Quarterlytics / Joules Group Plc

Joules Group Plc

joul · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker joul
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · Joules Group Plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
GROWING STRONGER
 TOGETHER
ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS
2020/2021

www.joulesgroup.com
OUR PURPOSE 
We brighten lives with the joy of 
the countryside; and fight for the 
environment that inspires us.
Established by Tom Joule in Britain over three decades 
ago, Joules is a premium British lifestyle Group, with 
an authentic heritage, comprising the Joules brand, 
the Friends of Joules digital marketplace, and Garden 
Trading, a leading digital-led brand in the home, garden 
and outdoor category. 

CONTENTS
03	
Highlights
CHAPTER 1 – STRATEGIC REPORT 
09 	
Chairman’s Statement
12 	
Our Business Model
14 	
Chief Executive’s Report
24 	
Financial Review
32 	
Principal Risks and Uncertainties 
36 	
Social Responsibility – ‘Responsibly Joules’
46 	
Our Inclusively Joules Charter
48 	
Section 172 Statement 
CHAPTER 2 – CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
54 	
Board of Directors
55 	
Governance Framework
58 	
Audit Committee Report
60 	
Nomination Committee Report
61 	
Directors’ Remuneration Report
72 	
Directors’ Report
75 	
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities
CHAPTER 3 – CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
78 	
Auditor’s Report
84 	
Consolidated Income Statement
84 	
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
85 	
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position
86 	
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
87 	
Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
88 	
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
117 	 Company Statement of Financial Position
118 	 Company Statement of Changes in Equity
119	 Notes to the Company Financial Statements
125 	 Company Information

02
HIGHLIGHTS
CAUTIONARY STATEMENT REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS
Certain information contained in this document, including any information as to the Group’s strategy, plans or future financial 
or operating performance, constitutes “forward-looking statements”. These forward-looking statements may be identified by 
the use of forward-looking terminology, including the terms “believes”, “estimates”, “anticipates”, “projects”, “expects”, 
“intends”, “aims”, “plans”, “predicts”, “may”, “will”, “seeks”, “could”, “targets”, “assumes”, “positioned” or “should” or, in 
each case, their negative or other variations or comparable terminology, or by discussions of strategy, plans, objectives, goals, 
future events or intentions. These forward-looking statements include all matters that are not historical facts. They appear in a 
number of places throughout this document and include statements regarding the intentions, beliefs or current expectations of 
the Directors concerning, among other things, the Group’s results of operations, financial condition, prospects, growth, 
strategies and the industries in which the Group operates.
By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risks and uncertainties because they relate to events and depend on 
circumstances that may or may not occur in the future or are beyond the Group’s control. Forward-looking statements are not 
guarantees of future performance. Even if the Group’s actual results of operations, financial condition and the development of 
the industries in which the Group operates are consistent with the forward-looking statements contained in this document, those 
results or developments may not be indicative of results or developments in subsequent periods. Accordingly, undue reliance 
should not be placed on these statements.
The forward-looking statements contained in this document speak only as of the date of this document. The Group and its 
Directors expressly disclaim any obligation or undertaking to update or revise publicly any forward-looking statements, 
whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, unless required to do so by applicable law, the AIM Rules 
for Companies or the Disclosure and Transparency Rules.
Note: The financial information contained in this document, including the financial information presented in a number of tables 
in this document, has been rounded to the nearest whole number or the nearest decimal place. Therefore, the actual arithmetic 
total of the numbers in a column or row in a certain table may not conform exactly to the total figures given for that column or 
row. In addition, certain percentages presented in the tables in this document reflect calculations based upon the underlying 
information prior to rounding, and accordingly, may not conform exactly to the percentages that would be derived if the 
relevant calculations were based upon the rounded numbers.

03
HIGHLIGHTS
HIGHLIGHTS
FY21 PERFORMANCE:
Group revenue increased by 4.3% to £199.0 million (FY20: £190.8 million) 
with strong e-commerce sales growth and the contribution from Garden 
Trading¹, more than offsetting the impact of enforced store closures, the 
cancellation of country shows across the UK and the impact of the pandemic 
on the Group’s wholesale customers.
•	 E-commerce sales increased by 48% to £122.0 million (FY20: £82.7 
million). Excluding the acquisition of Garden Trading², e-commerce sales 
increased by 43%. This growth was led by sales through the Group’s 
own websites³. E-commerce represented 77% of the Group’s retail 
revenue during the Period (FY20: 56%). 
•	 Overall store and show sales were £36.6 million in the year (FY20: 
£63.2 million). This performance reflects the forced closure of non-
essential retail stores, and cancellation of shows and events as a result of 
COVID-19. In the Period, our stores were closed for approximately six 
months of the Period compared with two months in the prior year. 
•	 Wholesale revenue in the Period, including Garden Trading², was £35.3 
million, a 17% reduction year-on-year (FY20: £42.7 million), reflecting 
the ongoing impact of COVID-19 on many of the Group’s wholesale 
partners both in the UK and internationally.
•	 Other revenue more than doubled to £5.1 million (FY20: £2.2 million). 
This reflects the strong growth of our Friends of Joules digital marketplace 
and strong performance from several of our licensed product categories 
and partnerships.
RECONCILIATION TO STATUTORY PROFIT/LOSS BEFORE TAX:
£MILLION
FY21⁸
FY20 (RESTATED)⁹
PBT/LBT4 – before exceptional costs
6.1
(3.9)
Exceptional costs
(4.2)
(21.0)
Statutory profit/(loss) before tax
2.0
(24.8)
1	
On 9 February 2021 the Group acquired 100% of the issued share capital, and obtained control of, The Garden Trading Company Limited (company number 2854160). The Garden Trading Company 
Limited is a digitally focused retailer of home and garden products. See Note 3 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.
2	
Garden Trading e-commerce revenue in the period since acquisition to 30 May 2021 was £4.3 million, and wholesale revenue was £4.4 million.
3	
joules.com, joulesusa.com, tomjoule.de and the Joules ebay store
4	
PBT/LBT – before exceptional costs is a non-GAAP measure provided to facilitate comparison across periods, it is stated prior to exceptional costs that are primarily related to non-cash asset impairments 
in the current and previous periods, see Note 4 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.
5	
Customers registered on our database who have transacted in the last 12 months.
6	
Brand Awareness and Brand Health are measured as part of an independent YouGov consumer survey.
7	
‘Net cash’ represents gross cash and cash equivalents less total borrowings. See Note 26 of the Consolidated Financial Statements. 
8	
This year, we are reporting on the 52 weeks ended 30 May 2021 compared to 53 weeks to 31 May 2020 in the prior year. To provide a comparison with last year’s 53-week period, the unaudited 
contribution of the additional week in last year’s results was approximately 1% of revenue and profit.
9	
For further details of the prior period restatement, refer to the Financial Review section of this report, and Note 1 of the Consolidated Financial Statements
•	 PBT4 before exceptional costs was £6.1 million (FY20: loss of 
£3.9 million).
•	 Exceptional costs in the Period totalled £4.2 million (FY20: £21.0m) 
including a £2.9 million (FY20: £20.5 million) non-cash impairment 
charge, £0.6 million (FY20: nil) Garden Trading acquisition costs and 
£0.7 million (FY20: £0.5m) restructuring costs.
•	 Statutory profit before tax was £2.0 million (FY20: loss of £24.8 million).
•	 Statutory profit after tax was £0.9 million (FY20: loss of 20.3m).
•	 Group gross margin was 49.0%, down 1.7%pts on the prior year, 
impacted by a lower proportion of higher margin store sales, increased 
freight costs and increased duty and transportation cost for deliveries into 
EU markets following Brexit.
•	 Basic earnings per share was 0.82 pence (FY20: loss of 21.61 pence).
•	 1.7 million active customers5 (FY20: 1.4 million) and record brand 
awareness and brand health6 metrics achieved during the final quarter of 
the year.
•	 Net cash7 of £4.1 million (FY20: £4.5 million).

04
OUR BRAND VALUES

05
OUR BRAND VALUES
OUR BRAND VALUES
CONTEMPORARY COUNTRY LOVING
We celebrate our rural roots by designing clothing, 
accessories and homeware for today’s family lifestyle.
INSPIRED BY NATURE
We take inspiration from all of the flora and fauna that can be found 
in the countryside and along the coasts of Britain.
RESPECT THE ENVIRONMENT
As a brand that was established in the countryside, we see it as our 
responsibility to look after the world around us.
CONNECT WITH LIFE’S HAPPY FEELINGS 
Life is busy. We want to slow down, stop and take pleasure in 
the simple things that make us happy.
CLOTHES TO ENABLE YOUR LIFESTYLE
We blend style with practicality to create collections that are built to last.
COLOUR AND PRINT
Our Print Team are experts in colour. All of our prints are hand-drawn or 
hand-painted in-house, and the unique way we use colour and print 
makes us stand out from the crowd.
CAPTURING THE SEASONS
Spring, summer, autumn and winter. In Britain we’re lucky to have four very 
different seasons. We always look to them for inspiration.
FUN
Our upbeat and positive outlook on life can be seen in everything we do – 
from the way we use colour and print to our tone of voice and packaging.
ATTENTION TO DETAIL
Our designs capture not only the eye but the imagination. Hidden details are 
set to surprise and delight people of all ages. 
QUALITY
It can be seen in the way we work and felt in what we create.


	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
DIGGING INTO THE DETAIL
The Joules story began in 1989, when Tom Joule 
started selling clothing on a stand at a country show in 
Leicestershire. Tom would constantly brave the elements in 
pursuit of delivering traditional clothing with a twist. The 
early days, facing driving rain and howling winds, have 
made us experts in outwitting the weather and made sure an 
adventurous spirit is woven throughout everything we create.

STRATEGIC REPORT1


09
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT
JOULES GROUP PLC
IAN FILBY
Non-Executive Chairman 
INTRODUCTION
In my Chairman’s Statement in the Group’s FY20 
Annual Report, which was published during the first 
wave of the coronavirus pandemic, I outlined 
Joules’ initial responses to the unprecedented 
challenges facing the retail sector. I also expressed 
my confidence that the relevance of the Joules 
brand, the flexibility of our business model, and the 
strength of the Group’s financial position meant that 
Joules was well positioned to withstand the 
pressures of the pandemic and emerge an even 
stronger brand and business. Whilst we are not 
through the pandemic yet, and significant levels of 
uncertainty persist, the Group’s performance and 
progress over the past 12 months has only 
strengthened my confidence in these convictions.
I am incredibly proud of how the business has adapted in the face of this 
most testing of circumstances over the last 18 months. During this period, the 
Group has evolved significantly into a digital led, increasingly diversified 
lifestyle Group. Whilst the Joules brand continues to sit at the centre of the 
Group, we now operate a second, very exciting brand in Garden Trading, 
and our Friends of Joules digital marketplace means that we now sell more 
than 400 other carefully curated brands to our growing customer base, 
thereby replicating the experience of a bustling market town through the 
Group’s digital channels. This strategic progress and performance during the 
year is a great testament to the skill, decisiveness, and hard work of our 
outstanding management team, as well as the forward-looking investments 
made over many years in the Group’s people, product offering, 
infrastructure, and technology.
FY21 PERFORMANCE OVERVIEW
FY21 Group revenue of £199.0 million (FY20: £190.8 million) and PBT 
before exceptional costs of £6.1 million were ahead of the Board’s initial 
expectations (see Note 5 of the Consolidated Financial Statements). This 
pleasing set of results primarily reflects the strong performance of the 
Group’s digital proposition, whilst the store estate was closed for 
approximately six months of the year, and the Group’s growing active 
customer numbers. Joules is an increasingly digital brand, with 77% of retail 
revenues generated from digital channels in the year. The Group’s strong 
online proposition continues to be supported and complemented by a 
portfolio of attractively located stores as well as relationships with selected 
retail and wholesale partners both in the UK and internationally.
Joules’ active customer base, a key metric for the Group, continued to grow 
and now stands at nearly 1.7 million customers (excluding Garden Trading). 
This increase reflects the relevance of the brand and its products, effective 
digital marketing investment, and enhanced levels of brand awareness and 
engagement. 
E-commerce sales during FY21 (the ‘Period’) increased by 48% against the 
prior year. This growth reflected a 47% increase in customer traffic to the 
Joules websites as well as improved customer conversion trends. The strong 
digital performance continued the momentum delivered in the final quarter of 
FY20 and was made possible by the Group’s strategic investment in its 
technology platform, which includes the fast-growing ‘Friends of Joules’ digital 
marketplace, and enhancement of fulfilment capabilities over recent years.
In addition to successfully driving growth through both the Joules platform 
and our digital and retail partnerships, the Group further strengthened and 
diversified its digital proposition and product offer through the acquisition 
of The Garden Trading Company Limited (‘Garden Trading’) in February 
2021. Garden Trading designs and sells distinctive home, garden and 
outdoor products through its own digital platform and through more than 
1,000 stockists across the UK. Both businesses enjoy a close cultural 
alignment and the acquisition strengthens Joules’ position in the fast-growing 
home and garden category.
The impact of the pandemic on the Group’s performance was most 
profoundly felt across the store, wholesale and shows channels. Joules stores 
were closed for approximately half of the 52-week period, and, when open, 
experienced lower footfall levels than the prior year largely due to physical 
distancing practices. This was a similar story for many of our wholesale 
partners in the UK and in our targeted international markets of Germany and 
the US. All major country shows and events that the business usually attends 
during the year were also cancelled. The Group was able to mitigate the 
impact by increasing its digital sales, careful cost management, and utilising 
“I am incredibly proud of how 
the business has adapted in the face 
of this most testing of circumstances 
over the last 18 months.”

10
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT CONTINUED
support schemes such as the UK Government’s Coronavirus Job Retention 
Scheme (£4.6 million of claims in the Period) and business rates relief (£2.3 
million of rates relief in the Period). In addition, the Board is very grateful for 
the flexibility and support of other stakeholders including employees, 
landlords and other key suppliers, including Clipper in the UK distribution 
centre, stock suppliers across our supply base and many other key partners, 
during the year.
The Group has maintained robust financial discipline through the Period with 
a strong focus on cash, liquidity and cost control, whilst also maintaining 
investment in the areas that the Board believe will drive growth over the 
coming years. The Group had net cash of £4.1 million at the Period end 
(FY20: £4.5 million). In April 2021, the Group extended the term of its 
financing facilities with Barclays Bank PLC through to September 2024, 
taking the opportunity to convert the arrangement to an ‘ESG – 
Sustainability’ facility, linked to the achievement of specific sustainability 
targets, providing further confidence in the financial position of the Group 
alongside focus and importance of the Responsibly Joules strategy. 
The Financial Review section of this Annual Report provides more detail on 
the Group’s financial performance during the year. 
DIVIDEND
As a result of the challenges impacting the Period and the continued 
increased levels of uncertainty facing many consumer sectors, the Board has 
determined that it would not be appropriate to declare a dividend for the 
Period. The Board will continue to review the financial position of the Group 
within the context of the external environment and intends to recommence 
dividend payments when it is financially prudent to do so.
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
Marc Dench, the Group’s Chief Financial Officer (‘CFO’), stepped down 
from his position on the Board on 11 May 2021 following more than five 
years with the Group. Marc made a significant contribution to the success of 
the business since its IPO, helping to drive the Group’s transition to the 
digital-led brand it is today. He also played a critical role over the past 12 
months in helping Joules to navigate the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic. 
On behalf of the Board, I would like to place on record our sincere thanks to 
Marc for his immense skill and leadership during his time with the Group. We 
wish him every success in the future. 
In April 2021 we were delighted to announce the appointment of Caroline 
York as Marc’s successor following a thorough search process. Caroline 
joined Joules on 26 July 2021 from Moneysupermarket Group Plc, the 
FTSE250 price comparison business, where she was Finance Director. Prior 
to Moneysupermarket, Caroline held finance leadership positions at 
Heathrow and BAA and, before that, held roles at Atos, KPMG and PwC. 
Caroline’s extensive experience in senior finance roles at strong consumer 
brands and digital-led businesses, as well as property-related businesses, 
made her the stand-out candidate for the role and the Board is delighted to 
welcome her to the business.
In the period between Marc standing down from the Board and Caroline 
joining the Board, the Group appointed Jon Dargie, the Group’s Finance 
Controller, as Interim CFO. During this period, Jon reported directly to the 
Joules Board.
In our FY20 Annual Results we announced that the role of Tom Joule, 
Founder and Chief Brand Officer, would be evolving with a reduced 
working pattern and a primary focus on supporting some of the Group’s 
business development initiatives, such as the establishment of Friends of 
Joules and acquisition of Garden Trading. During the Period, Friends of 
Joules has grown significantly and the initial integration of Garden Trading 
into the Group has been completed successfully. The Group announces that, 
effective from September 2021, Tom’s role will reduce to primarily focus on 
his responsibilities as a Non-Executive Director of the Group. In addition to 
his Board responsibilities, Tom will continue to provide an advisory role in 
relation to some of the Group’s business development initiatives, with a total 
anticipated time commitment of approximately one day per week. 
OUTLOOK
The Group has entered FY22 in a strong position with an increased and 
growing active customer base and brand health metrics for Joules at all-time 
highs. Since the start of the new financial year, the Group has traded in line 
with the Board’s expectations. 
Our Retail channel, comprising e-commerce, stores and shows, has 
continued to perform well reflecting demand for the Joules brand and the 
attractive locations of our stores. The Group’s home, garden and outdoor 
ranges – mainly sold under the Garden Trading brand – have performed 
well and demonstrate the increasing diversification of the Group’s revenues. 
Wholesale revenue, as anticipated, is lower than pre-pandemic levels. The 
Board expects wholesale activity to return to more normal levels over the 
course of the next 12-18 months. 
Country shows and events are restarting gradually, and we expect to be 
back to a normal calendar of events in the coming months.
We look forward with optimism as normality returns to the markets and 
channels in which we operate. However, we remain vigilant of the potential 
for further external challenges including possible disruption to international 
freight over the coming financial year, and the ongoing impact of the 
pandemic.
Joules is a very strong, differentiated, and highly relevant business that the 
Board believes is well-positioned to meet consumers’ evolving priorities and 
shopping preferences. In addition, the Group has a robust financial position, 
well-invested operations, and a clear strategy to continue to expand and 
grow customer numbers both in the UK and priority international markets.
Over the last 18 months the Group has broadened its product offer, 
accelerated its digital commerce capability, and scaled several new 
attractive revenue streams – including Friends of Joules, product licensing 
and the home, garden and outdoor category. From a channel, product and 
income perspective, the Group is now more flexible and diversified than 
ever. 
As a result, the Board remains confident in the Group’s ability to continue 
to adapt and react swiftly to what will remain dynamic trading conditions 
over the coming months and to continue to deliver the brand’s exciting, 
long-term growth.
IAN FILBY
Chairman

	 Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 2
11

12
UNIQUE BRAND AND FLEXIBLE, 
DIGITALLY-LED BUSINESS MODEL
OUR PRODUCTS
  WOMENSWEAR
  MENSWEAR
  FOOTWEAR
  ACCESSORIES
  CHILDRENSWEAR
  HOMEWARE
  GIFTING
The Joules brand offers unique design-led clothing and accessories 
that reflect our customers’ lifestyles come rain or shine. Joules-branded 
products span womenswear, menswear, footwear, accessories, 
childrenswear, homeware and gifting. Our designs are distinctive in 
their signature use of colour and prints that are hand-drawn by our 
in-house team. 
We recognise that Joules-branded products and collections must 
always have a clear purpose. This means being design rather than 
fashion led, sourcing responsibly, and taking an innovative approach 
to make sure that our core products surprise and delight customers 
through their design detail and diligence on quality.
During the year, the Group significantly expanded the product offer 
available to customers by expanding the number of third party brands 
sold on the Friends of Joules marketplace and through the acquisition 
of Garden Trading, whose products cover the home, garden, outdoor 
and lighting categories. The Group aims to ensure that all products, 
whether Joules-branded, sold by a carefully selected partner on 
Friends of Joules or designed and developed by Garden Trading, all 
share common lifestyle values, design credentials, quality and attention 
to detail.
OUR BUSINESS MODEL
Joules is a British lifestyle Group. At the centre of our business is the 
Joules brand. We distribute Joules-branded products to customers 
seamlessly across multiple channels, enabling customers to engage 
and shop with the brand wherever, whenever, and however they 
choose. Our digital platform is supported by well located, enticing 
stores that enrich the brand, as well as selected retail and wholesale 
partnerships in the UK and internationally. This flexible and 
integrated approach balances the brand’s exposure to any single 
route to market in what is set to become an even more dynamic, 
competitive, and increasingly digital-led retail landscape. 
The Group also works with selected licence partners, who are 
specialists in certain product categories, in order to take the Joules 
brand’s distinctive signature prints and colours into new product 
categories that are relevant to our customers’ lifestyles, such as 
toiletries, eyewear and homeware. A number of these successful 
licensing partnerships are now in their fourth year, reflecting the 
appeal of the Joules brand across non-core lifestyle categories.
The Group also operates a fast-growing digital marketplace, 
called Friends of Joules, which aims to bring the experience of a 
bustling market town to consumers on their digital devices. Through 
Friends of Joules, the Group offers thousands of products to the 
Group’s customer base from a carefully curated selection of more 
than 400 third-party brands that offer complementary products to 
those offered by the Joules brand.
Following the acquisition of The Garden Trading Company Limited 
in February 2021, the Group also now operates the Garden 
Trading brand. Garden Trading is a fast-growing and digital brand 
in the attractive home, garden and outdoor category that is highly 
complementary to the Joules brand. We see significant potential to 
further develop and grow this category under the Garden Trading 
brand over the coming years. The acquisition has further 
strengthened the Group’s digital presence and broadened its 
product offer for consumers
OUR BUSINESS MODEL

13
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
JOULES GROUP – 
A DIGITAL LIFESTYLE PLATFORM/DESTINATION
HOW OUR CUSTOMERS SHOP WITH THE GROUP:
OUR BUSINESS MODEL
FRIENDS OF JOULES
An increasingly important 
component of our digital platform 
is the fast-growing ‘Friends of 
Joules’ digital marketplace, which 
aims to bring the experience of a 
bustling market town to consumers 
on their digital devices. ‘Friends of 
Joules’ enables carefully curated 
third-party brands to offer 
complementary products to the 
Joules customer base, enhancing 
Joules’ digital platform with 
thousands of products from 
hundreds of creative businesses 
and providing customers with 
everything they could ever 
need for a contemporary 
country lifestyle.
GARDEN TRADING
   
The Group was also delighted to 
strengthen its digital presence 
and broaden its product offer 
with the strategic acquisition of 
Garden Trading in February 
2021. Garden Trading is a 
fast-growing and highly 
complementary digital brand in 
the attractive home, garden and 
outdoor category. We see 
significant potential to further 
develop and grow this category 
under the Garden Trading brand 
over the coming years.
THE JOULES BRAND
   
   
The cornerstone of the Group’s success and development 
is the Joules brand, which stands for family, fun and time off 
together. We take inspiration from nature and the changing 
British seasons to reflect and support our customers’ lifestyles. 
Come rain or shine, we add colour to woodland walks, 
picnics on the beach, cosy nights in and journeys to school. 
Joules’ aim is to brighten its customers’ lives with the joy of the 
countryside.
A core element of the Joules brand is our Responsibly Joules 
ethos that is central to everything we do. From the day Joules 
started more than 30 years ago with nothing more than a 
table in a field, we have always been conscious of our 
impact on the environment, the wildlife within it, the people 
we work with, and the communities where we operate. 
We are proud to champion sustainability and fight for 
the environment that inspires us. 
WHERE CAN 
CUSTOMERS BUY 
OUR PRODUCTS? 
CHANNELS KEY
THIRD PARTY PARTNERSHIPS
   
The Group also works with selected licence partners who are 
specialists in certain product categories in order to take the Joules 
brand’s distinctive signature prints and colours into new product 
categories that are relevant to our customers’ lifestyles, such as 
toiletries, watches and homeware. A number of these successful 
licensing partnerships are now in their fourth year, reflecting the 
appeal of the Joules brand across non-core lifestyle categories.
Note: This page demonstrates where and how our 
customers can purchase our products. This does not 
represent how the Board report on the Group’s 
business. See Note 5 of the Consolidated Financial 
Statements for details of Segment Reporting.
Retail Stores & Shows
Wholesale
Digital & E-Commerce

14
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT
INTRODUCTION AND COVID-19 RESPONSE
NICK JONES
Chief Executive Officer 
INTRODUCTION
It is safe to say that FY21 was characterised by 
trading conditions unlike anything Joules has 
encountered in its more than 30-year history. 
Reflecting the impact of the coronavirus pandemic 
on the lives of consumers, the level of disruption 
and pace of change in the retail sector over the past 
12 months has been truly unprecedented. I am 
delighted to be able to report that, against this 
dynamic backdrop, Joules has been able to deliver 
a very solid financial performance and strong 
strategic progress. This outcome reflects, firstly, the 
strength and relevance of the Joules brand to an 
increasing number of customers and, secondly, the 
increasing importance of our digital proposition 
both to customers and within our business model.
Before going into the details of the Group’s strategic progress during FY21, 
I would like to take this opportunity to briefly summarise some of what I 
believe to be the key ‘headlines’ for Joules during what was such a testing 
but ultimately transformational year: 
THE JOULES BRAND HAS GONE FROM STRENGTH 
TO STRENGTH…
During the year we continued to deliver on our brand’s clear mission and 
purpose – to brighten our customers’ lives and conduct business in a 
responsible way. As more and more consumers increasingly valued their 
leisure time spent outdoors and time doing the things they love with the 
people they love, our brand has become increasingly relevant to a greater 
number of customers. Our brand awareness and brand health metrics clearly 
demonstrate our strong position and continued progress¹. 
DIVERSIFIED ATTRACTIVE REVENUE MODEL…
We now offer significantly more products across more categories allowing 
us to rapidly adapt our digital merchandising to meet changing consumer 
demands and lifestyle needs. We now provide our customers with more 
choice and more reasons to visit or return to the Joules website and Joules 
stores. Expanding the product offer through third party brands on Friends of 
Joules and licensed ranges such as the Joules sofa collection with DFS 
allows us to leverage the creativity, supply chain and distribution capabilities 
of third parties to expand the Joules brand.
JOULES IS AN INCREASINGLY DIGITAL-LED BRAND…
Driven by enhanced digital marketing capabilities, improvements to the 
online and mobile experience and the positive impact of our Friends of 
Joules digital marketplace. With 77% of retail sales made online in the 
Period and whilst stores were closed, Joules is an increasingly digital-led 
brand. This reflects the market-wide increase in e-commerce penetration, 
which has been accelerated by enforced closure of stores for approximately 
six months of the year.
HOWEVER, STORES CONTINUE TO PLAY AN IMPORTANT ROLE 
IN OUR ‘TOTAL RETAIL’ SEGMENT GROWTH…
Despite the growth in digital sales and widely publicised impact of the 
pandemic on stores and footfall, we continue to believe in the value of our 
stores which are predominantly in attractive local high street and lifestyle 
locations. When stores were able to remain open; they demonstrated their 
value in driving both sales, new customers and brand awareness. With the 
appropriate cost base and flexibility, we believe that stores will continue to 
play an important role in our ongoing strategy to develop as a leading 
lifestyle brand. During the Period, excluding concessions and franchises, the 
number of Joules stores has increased from 128 to 133 and total selling 
space has increased from 182,000 sqft to 197,000 sqft.
FRIENDS OF JOULES CONTINUES TO GROW AHEAD OF 
EXPECTATIONS…
During the Period the Friends of Joules digital marketplace continued to 
scale-up and demonstrate its value to both our business and our customers. 
The marketplace, which now sells more than 11,000 products – that are 
highly complementary to Joules’ core categories – from over 400 carefully 
curated sellers, is increasingly bringing the experience of a bustling market 
town to consumers through their digital devices. 
1 	
Brand awareness and brand health are measured as part of a daily independent YouGov 
consumer survey. During the Period, brand awareness increased by 2.0%pts to 48%, brand 
health was up 0.6%pts to 11.1 (the brand health metric runs on scale from –100 to +100). 

15
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT
GARDEN TRADING ACQUISITION FURTHER STRENGTHENS 
THE GROUP…
The acquisition of The Garden Trading Company Limited (‘Garden Trading’) 
in February 2021, provides the Group with a strong position in the 
complementary and attractive home, garden and outdoor category. Garden 
Trading and Joules target the same customer base and are closely aligned 
on their brand values, design approach and selling model, with a strong 
digital first, retail proposition supported by third party wholesale 
relationships. 
EVEN AGAINST A CHALLENGING TRADING BACKDROP, WE 
HAVE CONTINUED TO INVEST IN OUR LONG-TERM GROWTH…
We have continued to invest in our digital and fulfilment infrastructure to 
support our long-term growth plans. During the Period we increased the 
capacity of our UK distribution centre by 100,000 square feet to support the 
Group’s anticipated e-commerce growth over the medium term. We also 
completed the construction and fit-out of our new head office, The Joules 
Barn, which is a modern, flexible and collaborative space that is truly fit for 
post-COVID-19 working patterns and I believe will be a really important 
driver of our growth in the coming years. 
THE GROUP’S STRATEGIC PROGRESS AND PERFORMANCE 
WOULD NOT HAVE BEEN POSSIBLE WITHOUT THE HARD WORK, 
FLEXIBILITY AND, ABOVE ALL, DEDICATION OF 
OUR OUTSTANDING TEAM… 
The talent and dedication of the Joules team has once again been 
highlighted in a year characterised by disruption to the ways we have been 
able to work together and interact. I am incredibly proud of, and grateful for, 
the commitment shown by our people, from our head office teams to those 
on the front line in our stores, during this challenging period.
RESPONDING TO THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC 
The trading conditions in the Period were heavily influenced by the impact of 
the COVID-19 pandemic on the lives of consumers. Before going any 
further, it is right to acknowledge the tragic impact that COVID-19 has had 
on individuals and families across the world, and I would like to extend my 
deepest sympathy to those in the Joules community who have been affected.
I am proud of how Joules responded and adapted to the disruption caused 
by the pandemic. This disruption was most profoundly felt during the early 
stages of the financial year when we operated during and in the immediate 
aftermath of the first UK-wide national lockdown, and for large parts of the 
second half of the year when different parts of the UK were faced with 
varying levels and durations of lockdown restrictions. 
The Group was able to mitigate the impact by increasing its digital sales, 
careful cost management and by utilising support schemes such as the UK 
Government’s Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme through which £4.6 million 
of claims were made during the Period and business rates relief which 
provided £2.3 million of relief during the year. In addition, the Board remains 
very grateful for the flexibility and support from other stakeholders, including 
landlords, employees and suppliers, including Clipper Logistics in the UK 
distribution centre, stock suppliers across our supply base and many other 
key partners. 
DIVERSIFIED ATTRACTIVE REVENUE MODEL
We now offer significantly more products across more categories 
allowing us to rapidly adapt our digital merchandising to meet 
changing consumer demands and lifestyle needs. We now provide our 
customers with more choice and more reasons to visit or return to the 
Joules website. Expanding the product offer through third party brands 
on Friends of Joules and licensed ranges such as the Joules sofa 
collection with DFS allows us to leverage the creativity, supply chain 
and distribution capabilities of third parties to expand the Joules brand.

16
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT
NAVIGATING THE COVID-19 IMPACT
•	 Re-opened stores perform better than 
expectations despite lower year-on-year 
footfall
•	 All country shows and events cancelled
•	 Wholesale sales impacted by slower recovery 
of the wholesale channel
HOW WE ADAPTED AND RESPONDED
•	 Created an additional 100,000 square feet 
of capacity at our UK distribution centre 
to support the Group’s anticipated 
e-commerce growth
•	 Introduced safeguarding measures as stores 
re-opened including managing staffing levels 
to allow for physical distancing, limiting the 
number of customers in store at any one time, 
Perspex screens at points of sale, providing PPE 
for our employees, and enhancing hygiene 
measures
OCTOBER 2020–DECEMBER 2020
COVID-19 IMPACT ON OUR BUSINESS
•	 UK Government imposes tiered levels of 
restrictions impacting our ability to keep 
open stores in different parts of the UK at 
different times
•	 Lower store footfall 
results from 
increases in 
COVID-19 cases
•	 A four-week 
national lockdown 
imposed in England 
during November 
resulting in the 
closure of all Joules 
stores and those of 
our UK wholesale 
partners for the 
important Black 
Friday and 
pre-Christmas 
trading periods
MARCH–MAY 2020
COVID-19 IMPACT ON OUR BUSINESS
•	 First national lockdown – all stores closed 
before 23 March 2020
•	 Wholesale impacted UK/International
•	 E-commerce focus with DC constraints
HOW WE ADAPTED AND RESPONDED
•	 Financial stability – placing/revolving credit 
facility increase
•	 Stock suppliers – rephased, reduced 
•	 Cash management – capex, costs
•	 Carefully managed e-commerce demand 
with fulfilment capability 
JUNE 2020–SEPTEMBER 2020
COVID-19 IMPACT ON OUR BUSINESS
•	 Continued to satisfy customer demand 
through our UK e-commerce website, albeit 
with constrained warehouse capacity due to 
physical distancing restrictions
•	 UK stores and all UK wholesale partner stores 
closed until 15 June 2020. Phased re-
opening of stores from 15 June 2020 with 
all stores open by early August
•	 Additional operational costs as we made 
stores as safe as possible for employees 
and customers
2020
2021

17
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT
HOW WE ADAPTED 
AND RESPONDED
•	 Continued 
investment in the 
Friends of Joules 
digital marketplace 
provided customers 
with a broader 
online offer during 
the important 
Christmas gifting 
season
DECEMBER 2020–APRIL 2021
COVID-19 IMPACT ON OUR BUSINESS
•	 All UK stores and wholesale partners 
stores closed from mid-December during 
the peak Christmas trading season as all 
countries in the UK enter national 
lockdowns
•	 Non-essential retail stores re-open 
across the UK from mid-April, with 
England reopen from 12 April
HOW WE ADAPTED AND RESPONDED
•	 Acquisition of Garden Trading, a 
digitally-led retailer of home and garden 
products inspired by the British 
countryside and lifestyle trends, 
supporting the Group’s strategy to grow 
its customer base, broaden its product 
offer and strengthen its digital platform
•	 New partnership to open a total of six 
Joules stores (five open at year-end) in 
Center Parcs villages across the UK and 
Ireland from April, aligning two outdoor 
loving, family-focused lifestyle brands
MAY 2021
•	 Stores open with physical distancing 
measures
COVID-19 IMPACT 
ON OUR BUSINESS
In total, store trading hours were approximately 50% of their typical annual 
trading time. Partner stores similarly impacted by closures and Government 
restrictions.
Increased digital demand as e-commerce penetration grew across the 
retail market. 
HOW WE ADAPTED 
AND RESPONDED
Always prioritising the health, safety, and wellbeing of the Joules community 
and all our stakeholders.
Additional investment in digital marketing and the online proposition in order 
to drive digital growth and capture consumer demand.
Continued cash and cost base management, including head office costs 
and lease renegotiations, as well as utilisation of several of the UK 
Government’s support initiatives including rates relief for stores (£2.3 million) 
and the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme for furloughed employees 
(£4.6 million).
Flexible and seamless remote working leveraging the IT investments made in 
recent years.
Continuing to support our local communities. Profits from our specially 
curated ‘Rainbow Edit’ collection comprising a range of products featuring 
colourful splashes of bright rainbows and rainbow colours raised more than 
£105,000 for NHS Charities Together Urgent COVID-19 Appeal during 
the year.

FY21
FY20
FY19
FY18
FY17
34.8%
38.4%
49.5%
56.6%
76.9%
FY21
FY20
FY19
FY18
FY17
132
159
175
182
197
FY21
FY20
FY19
FY18
FY17
991
1,230
1,394
1,428
1,670
FY21
FY20
FY19
FY18
FY17
105
119
125
128
133
FY21
FY20
FY19
FY18
FY17
11.5%
13.1%
16.1%
15.5%
12.6%
18
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT
FY21 BUSINESS REVIEW
GROWTH STRATEGY
STRATEGIC PROGRESS
The sudden impact of the pandemic on the lives of consumers accelerated 
pre-existing structural changes in consumer behaviour, including significantly 
increasing e-commerce penetration across the retail sector. Against this 
backdrop, in our FY21 Interim announcement, we outlined the pillars of our 
refocused strategy for the long-term growth and development of Joules as a 
premium lifestyle brand in the UK and internationally. 
STRATEGIC KPIs
Online percentage of Retail
Total selling space1 (‘000 sq ft)
Active customer numbers2 (‘000)
1	
Joules retail stores only, excludes concessions and franchise stores; 33 concessions operated at May 2021 (33 at May 2020 and 2019; five at May 2018 and previous years) and three franchises. 
2	
Customers registered on our database who have transacted in the last 12 months. FY19 and prior years restated to reflect enhanced customer database matching processes.
Number of stores1
International as percentage of total revenue
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT

19
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
STRATEGIC PROGRESS SUMMARY
HIGHLIGHTS AND KPIs
STRONG DISTINCTIVE BRAND
The careful development of our strong, 
distinctive, and highly relevant brand remains 
central to all pillars of our growth strategy.
•	 Brand awareness increased by 2%pts to 48%
•	 Facebook and Instagram social media followers increased 
by 96k to 906k
•	 Continued progress against Responsibly Joules sustainability commitments
•	 Center Parcs partnership
•	 More than £105,000 raised for the NHS Charities Together Urgent 
COVID-19 Appeal during the year
GROW THE ACTIVE 
CUSTOMER BASE
We aim to, firstly, grow our active customer 
base and, secondly, increase those customers’ 
frequency of interaction and spend with 
the brand.
•	 Total active customers grew by 17% to 1.7 million
•	 Digital active customers grew by 50% to 1.3 million
•	 Garden Trading 100,000 active customers
BROADEN THE PRODUCT OFFER
We aim to broaden and expand the product 
offer available to both existing and new 
customers, thereby encouraging customers to 
spend a greater proportion of their ‘lifestyle 
spend’ with Joules.
•	 Friends of Joules continued to expand to now offer >11,000 products from 
over 400 sellers (FY20: 7,000 products from 200 sellers)
•	 Additional 1,500 new home, garden, and outdoor lines to the Group’s 
offering following acquisition of Garden Trading
•	 DFS sales growth greater than 100% yoy with strong growth online led by 
the continued appeal of the Joules sofa range
STRENGTHEN THE 
DIGITAL PLATFORM
We aim to continually enhance the Joules 
digital platform so that it captures and offers 
customers the complete Joules experience.
•	 Gross demand on the Joules digital platform increased by 48%
•	 Website traffic to joules.com increased by 47% year on year
•	 Joules.com conversion rate also improving by 0.4%pts to 4.4%
LEVERAGE THIRD PARTY 
PARTNERSHIPS
We aim to develop opportunities to efficiently 
grow the brand both in the UK and 
internationally through selected third-party 
digital and physical retail partners.
•	 New digitally focused partnership with Marks & Spencer to sell selected 
womenswear products on marksandspencer.com
•	 Expanded our partnership with Zalando in Europe
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT

20
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT
STRATEGY AND BUSINESS MODEL
OUR STRONG AND DISTINCTIVE BRAND 
The golden thread that runs through each pillar of our growth strategy 
remains the careful development of our strong, distinctive, and highly 
relevant brand. I believe that this relevance will only grow stronger over the 
coming years as we expect consumers to feel increasingly loyal and 
connected to brands that share their personal values. It is for this reason that 
our Responsibly Joules ethos is more important than ever. We continue to 
work hard to make sure that we conduct business the right way, and we are 
committed to fighting for the environment that inspires us. During the year we 
made further progress against our sustainability priorities including removing 
all virgin plastics from our packaging and advancing against our target to 
source only sustainable materials including cotton, leather, rubber, denim 
and synthetics by 2022. Underlining the importance of, and focus on, our 
Responsibly Joules priorities, we converted our financing facilities with 
Barclays Bank PLC to an ‘ESG – Sustainability’ facility with the financing 
costs linked to the achievement of sustainability targets. Further details on our 
Responsibly Joules strategy and activity during the year can be found in the 
Responsibly Joules section of this Annual Report. 
During the year brand awareness increased by 2pts to 48%. Facebook and 
Instagram social media followers also increased by 96,000 to 906,000 
and brand health was at record levels, up 0.6pts to 11.1 (the brand health 
metric runs on scale from –100 to +100). Brand awareness and brand health 
are measured as part of an independent YouGov consumer survey. This 
strong progress in part reflected highly efficient digital marketing, the 
desirable and visible high street and lifestyle locations of the Group’s stores, 
and greater consumer awareness of our community, sustainability, and 
charitable activities.
By leveraging the strength and growing relevance of the distinctive Joules 
brand, the Group is focused on four key strategic drivers that the Board 
believes will underpin long-term, sustainable growth:
1.	 GROW OUR ACTIVE CUSTOMER BASE
The Group continues to focus on, firstly, growing its active global digital 
customer base and secondly, increasing those customers’ frequency of 
interaction and spend with the brand.
During the year, total active customers continued to grow, totalling 1.7 
million at the Period-end (FY20: 1.4 million) with 1.3 million of these active 
customers being digital customers (FY20: 0.9 million). These encouraging 
metrics reflect continued targeted and effective digital marketing investment, 
data-led customer communications and offers, and the positive impact of our 
attractive store portfolio on driving brand awareness. In addition, the 
significantly broadened product offering through our Friends of Joules digital 
marketplace continues to drive both customer acquisition and lifetime value 
by providing increased shopping opportunities with Joules. 
Despite this strong growth in customer numbers and customer value, we 
continue to see significant further headroom to grow and estimate there is an 
addressable UK market of up to 10 million customers. In addition, we remain 
excited about the medium to long-term brand growth and customer 
acquisition opportunities within our target international markets, which we 
aim to deliver through the continued development of our capital-light digital 
and wholesale presence. 
To support our brand growth and customer acquisition plans we will 
continue to increase our data-led digital marketing to target and efficiently 
acquire new digital customers. We will also focus on deepening existing and 
DRIVE TOTAL UK BRAND SALES – ‘TOTAL RETAIL’
E-commerce – We expect to continue to increase the mix of 
e-commerce sales as a proportion of our ‘Total Retail’ sales through 
ongoing enhancements to our digital platforms
Stores – Joules operates a portfolio of stores across the UK that 
enables our customers to shop and interact with the brand. As well as 
being important sales channels, our increasingly digitally enabled 
stores offer valuable touch points to showcase the brand to both 
existing and potential customers 
Wholesale – We continue to broaden the reach of the Joules brand 
through selected wholesale partners that are closely aligned with our 
brand values and product categories – including specialist 
independents, department stores, destination lifestyle retailers, 
subscription services and online retailers. Wholesale is an important 
‘capital light’ capability that facilitates our international growth strategy 
Country shows and events – Over the past 30 years, Joules has 
developed a strong brand presence at a wide range of country shows 
and events across the UK. The channel remains an important part of the 
Joules brand’s heritage and provides real customer connectivity
Marketplaces and concessions – As well as supporting the more 
traditional concession model, we continue to leverage our wholesale 
capabilities and relationships to support emerging new retail channels 
such as online marketplaces and ‘fulfilled by’ models that provide us 
with new routes to reach our target customer base in the UK and 
internationally.

21
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT
developing new digital retail partnerships and selectively growing our store 
estate in attractive lifestyle locations. A very exciting example of our store 
strategy was the partnership we announced in March 2021 to open Joules 
stores in the six Center Parcs locations in the UK and Republic of Ireland in 
time for the Summer 2021 holiday season, 5 of these stores were open by 
30 May 2021.
2.	 BROADENING THE PRODUCT OFFER
By broadening our product offer, we enable more customers to live more 
of their lives in the Joules way. We continue to see significant growth 
opportunities for Joules through expanding the ranges of products we sell to 
both existing and new customers, thereby encouraging customers to increase 
the proportion of their ‘lifestyle spend’ with Joules. 
We remain focused on broadening our distinctive core product ranges, 
increasing our men’s and kids collections, and extending into related product 
categories such as home, outdoor and garden through a combination of 
differentiated in-house design, curated brands available through our new 
Garden Trading brand plus Friends of Joules, and carefully selected 
licensing partnerships.
During the Period, Friends of Joules continued to expand and is increasingly 
bringing the experience of a bustling market town to consumers through their 
digital devices. The platform now offers over 11,000 products from more 
than 400 sellers across product categories including home, outdoor and 
garden, gifting, pet and clothing. In addition, following the acquisition of 
Garden Trading, we have added an additional 1,500 new home, garden, 
and outdoor lines to the Group’s offering. 
Our licensed product categories have continued to expand and perform 
well with a particularly strong performances by the Joules sofa range in 
partnership with DFS and pet collection in collaboration with Rosewood, 
as well as the continued development of our successful partnership with 
Boots, which saw the launch of a children’s range of Joules toiletries and 
gifting products.
3.	 STRENGTHENING THE DIGITAL PLATFORM 
We continue to invest in the Joules digital platform so that it offers customers 
the complete Joules experience. 
During the year, gross demand on the Joules digital platform increased by 
48%, with website traffic to joules.com increasing by 47% year on year and 
the conversion rate also improving by 0.4%pts to 4.4%. These positive trends 
were supported by the continued expansion of Friends of Joules, effective 
digital marketing investment, the growth in the active customer base, and 
continued investments in our e-commerce and mobile proposition, including 
enhancing site merchandising, product filtering and improving the payment 
journey for customers by adding various new payment options. 
4.	 LEVERAGE THIRD-PARTY PARTNERSHIPS
In addition to growing the Joules brand through our own retail channels, 
we continue to see significant opportunities to grow the brand both in the UK 
and internationally through selected third-party digital and physical retail 
partners. These third-party relationships provide the opportunity to extend 
the reach of the Joules brand to a broader customer base utilising the retail 
and fulfilment platforms of our partners. Our systems and infrastructure have 
been developed to support a range of third-party models including the more 
traditional wholesale and retail concession models as well as the emerging 
marketplace, drop-ship and ‘fulfilled by’ models. 

22
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT
CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REPORT CONTINUED
We have strong relationships with around 40 larger digital or multi-site 
retailers globally and a further 2,000 smaller specialist or independent 
retailers. 
During the year we developed several new digitally focused third-party 
partnerships including with Marks & Spencer with a curated selection of 
Joules womenswear products available via the marksandspencer.com 
e-commerce platform from April 2021. Internationally we expanded our 
partnership with Zalando in Europe and commenced working with Target in 
the US on a dropship, marketplace model. 
In August 2021 Rimal Patel will join the business in the role of Wholesale & 
Partnerships Director. Rimal was most recently Online Director at Tesco PLC 
and before that held senior roles at John Lewis and ShopDirect. Rimal will be 
responsible for strengthening and driving Joules’ partnerships both in the UK 
and target international markets.
INFRASTRUCTURE AND ORGANISATIONAL DESIGN
Shortly after the end of the Period we completed the construction and fit-out 
of our new head office in Market Harborough, called The Joules Barn. The 
opening of The Joules Barn represents a vitally important development in our 
journey and will enable Joules to be an even more collaborative and 
creative business whilst maximising the benefits of more flexible working 
patterns that have developed since the outbreak of the pandemic.
We have also continued to invest in our fulfilment infrastructure to support our 
long-term growth plans. During the first half of the year we created an 
additional 100,000 square feet of space at our UK distribution centre which 
included the completion of a new mezzanine level and the occupation of an 
adjoining warehouse to support the Group’s anticipated e-commerce 
growth over the medium term.
In the second half of the Period the Group completed a re-organisation of 
structures across the Group’s head office functions, which had commenced 
in FY20, as part of the ‘Joules Blueprint’ business strategy, to review 
organisational design and introduce clarity around roles and responsibilities.
GARDEN TRADING 
The acquisition of Garden Trading in February 2021 was an important 
milestone for the Group. The acquisition has provided the Group with a 
strong position in the important and fast-growing home, garden and outdoor 
market with a brand and team that is closely aligned with Joules’ core values 
customer base and business model. Further detail on the acquisition of 
Garden Trading is provided in Note 3 of the Consolidated Financial 
Statements.
The acquisition was driven by a clear strategic rationale helping to progress 
all pillars of Joules’ Growth strategy:
•	 Grow active customer base: Garden Trading has a fast-growing active 
customer base, now at over 100,000. The home, outdoor and garden 
category is highly relevant to the wider Joules customer base.
•	 Strengthen digital platform: Over half of Garden Trading’s sales are 
direct to consumers via its web platform and through digital 
marketplaces, including Friends of Joules
•	 Broaden product offer: Garden Trading brings over 1,500 distinctive, 
design-led products across home, garden, lighting and outdoor 
categories. We see opportunities to cross-market to the wider Joules 
customer base to drive growth in these categories 
•	 Leverage third parties: strong wholesale relationships in UK and Europe 
have been central to Garden Trading since it started in business. We see 
opportunities to leverage mutual relationships and to introduce Garden 
Trading to several of Joules’ existing third-party partners in the UK and 
internationally. 
We are delighted with the performance of Garden Trading over the first few 
months since the acquisition and the transition to Garden Trading operating 
as part of the Joules Group has been successful with all planned support 
functions and activities now fully aligned. Looking forward, we see 
significant potential to grow the home, garden and outdoor category under 
the Garden Trading brand leveraging Joules resources and capabilities to 
support this growth.
THE JOULES COMMUNITY
The skill, talent, and dedication of the Joules team during FY21 in the face of 
such a unique and unprecedented set of challenges has been nothing short 
of amazing. I would like to thank all my colleagues for their hard work during 
the year.
We have also continued to receive fantastic support from our suppliers, 
landlords, business partners, and customers. I would like to take this 
opportunity to thank everyone across the Joules community for their ongoing 
support for our business and brand.
NICK JONES
Chief Executive Officer

	 Chapter 1
Chapter 3
Chapter 2
23

24
FINANCIAL REVIEW
FINANCIAL REVIEW
JOULES GROUP PLC
Our FY21 financial year has been overshadowed 
by the ongoing impact of the COVID-19 global 
pandemic, with enforced retail store closures across 
the UK and Europe, remote working for all 
colleagues and ongoing disruption to global 
freight markets.
Against this backdrop the Group has delivered a strong financial 
performance, leveraging historic investments to support significant growth 
through our already well-established e-commerce channels. Our strong 
financial position has allowed us to invest in our growth strategy, including 
driving strong growth of our Friends of Joules digital marketplace platform 
and the acquisition in February 2021 of The Garden Trading Company 
Limited (‘Garden Trading’), a leading digitally focused outdoor, home and 
garden brand. As a result, we move into the new financial year with a 
business model now driven by predominantly digital revenue streams that 
leverage our brand and platform position, through a broader and more 
diversified product offer.
The performance in the year has demonstrated how we leverage our two 
‘special ingredients’ – the Joules brand and our lifestyle products – to deliver 
sales through our digital platform, which comprises: the front end website; 
warehouse and fulfilment; and, customer insight and digital marketing 
capability, all of which are areas that we have invested in over recent years. 
COVID-19 – IMPACT ON THE GROUP’S FINANCIAL POSITION 
AND RESULTS FOR THE PERIOD
The impact of COVID-19 in the Period and the actions taken to reduce costs, 
preserve cash and strengthen the Group’s financial position is summarised 
below with more in the relevant section of this Financial Review. 
IMPACT ON BUSINESS OPERATIONS AND SALES CHANNELS 
•	 Stores were closed for more than half of their potential trading hours. 
When open, stores traded at approximately 24% below the same period 
in FY19, with reduced footfall being partially offset by higher conversion 
rates
•	 No significant country shows, or events were attended in the year
•	 Wholesale dispatches were particularly low in the first quarter as our 
wholesale customers globally just started to reopen during the period. 
Sales momentum improved through the year, notwithstanding the impact 
of further lockdowns in the UK and EU
•	 Gross margins impacted by lower proportion of store sales – with store 
sales generating a higher gross margin than e-commerce, and an 
increased level of markdown sales in Q1 and Q4 in the stores channel 
due to clearing through stock positions held prior to going into lockdown.
OPERATING COSTS
•	 Lower store sales resulted in lower variable costs, including turnover 
rents, merchant fees, certain distribution costs, utilities, travel and 
expenses
•	 The Government’s Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (‘CJRS’) subsidised 
a substantial proportion of payroll costs for store colleagues, and some 
head office colleagues, that were furloughed whilst stores were closed. 
Approximately £4.6 million contribution to payroll costs was received in 
the Period
•	 Business rates relief, of approximately £2.3 million, was received across 
the year
•	 All non-furloughed colleagues agreed to voluntary pay reductions of up 
to 20% of the salary, that continued through the first quarter. The 
Directors agreed to additional voluntary pay reductions, as further 
detailed in the Directors’ Remuneration Report
•	 Many of the Group’s landlords either waived or reduced rent for the time 
that stores were unable to trade. The benefit from reduced rents is 
reflected within the IFRS 16 (Leases) accounting.
ACTIONS TAKEN TO PRESERVE CASH AND ENHANCE THE 
GROUP’S FINANCIAL POSITION AND LIQUIDITY
•	 Inventory purchase commitments and phasing of deliveries were actively 
managed – in collaboration with our suppliers 
•	 Rent deferral arrangements were agreed with many of the Group’s 
landlords
•	 Lease renegotiations to reduce rent levels, increase lease flexibility and/
or move to turnover based rent models continued to progress through the 
Period.
FINANCIAL POSITION AND LIQUIDITY 
At 30 May 2021 the Group had net cash of £4.1 million (FY20: £4.5 
million), comprising cash of £18.0 million and total borrowings of £13.9 
million (excluding lease liabilities). The Group had total liquidity headroom 
of £38.1 million at 30 May 2021, comprising cash of £18.0 million and 
£20.1 million of undrawn committed financial facilities. 
In April 2021, the Group extended the term of its £25 million revolving credit 
facility (‘RCF’) and £9.5 million term loan with Barclays Bank PLC, taking the 
opportunity to convert the RCF arrangement to an ‘ESG – Sustainability’ 
facility linked to the achievement of certain sustainability targets, providing 
further confidence in the financial position of the Group alongside focus on, 
and importance of, the Responsibly Joules strategy. Both facilities now expire 
in September 2024.
The Directors have concluded that it is appropriate to prepare the financial 
statements on the going concern basis. Further detail on the financial 
position, liquidity and going concern assessment is provided later within this 
Financial Review, the Directors’ Report and Note 1 of the Consolidated 
Financial Statements.
ACQUISITION OF GARDEN TRADING 
On 9 February 2021 the Group announced the acquisition of Garden 
Trading, a digitally led retailer of home and garden products inspired by the 
British countryside and lifestyle trends.
Total consideration for the acquisition was up to £12.5 million (on a cash 
free, debt free basis subject to a normalised level of working capital), with 
£9 million upfront consideration consisting of £4.5 million cash and £4.5 
million of Joules Group plc Ordinary Shares (2.83 million new Joules 
ordinary shares of 1 pence each), and up to £3.5 million deferred 
consideration (of which at least £3.0 million will be paid in cash and the rest 
either in cash or Ordinary Shares, at the Group’s discretion), subject to 
Garden Trading meeting certain targets over the period to 30 November 
2021.

25
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
FINANCIAL REVIEW
Garden Trading’s results have been consolidated as part of the Group since acquisition with its results being reported across the Retail and 
Wholesale segments. 
Further detail on the acquisition of Garden Trading is provided in Note 3 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.
GROUP RESULTS
PERIOD ENDED
£MILLION
MAY 2021
52 WEEKS
RESTATED MAY 
2020
53 WEEKS
Revenue
199.0
190.8
Gross profit
97.5
96.8
  Operating expenses
(72.1)
(79.8)
  Depreciation and amortisation*
(16.0)
(19.5)
  Share-based compensation
(1.7)
0.4
Administrative expenses
(89.8)
(98.9)
Operating profit/(loss) – before exceptional costs
7.7
(2.1)
Finance costs
(1.6)
(1.8)
Profit/(loss) before tax – before exceptional costs 
6.1
(3.9)
Gross margin percentage
49.0%
50.7%
Reconciliation to statutory results
Operating profit/(loss) – before exceptional costs
7.7
(2.1)
Exceptional costs
(4.2)
(21.0)
Operating profit/(loss)
3.6
(23.0)
Net finance costs
(1.6)
(1.8)
Statutory profit/(loss) before tax
2.0
(24.8)
EBITDA reconciliation
Operating profit/loss – before exceptional costs
7.7
(2.1)
Depreciation and amortisation
16.0
19.5
EBITDA – before exceptional costs
23.7
17.4
* Depreciation of Right-of-Use asset was £8.0 million (FY20: 12.6 million)
Group revenue increased by 4.3% to £199.0 million from £190.8 million last year, with strong growth in Joules’ e-commerce and the contribution from Garden 
Trading, more than offsetting the impact of enforced store closures, the cancellation of country shows across the UK and the impact of the pandemic on the 
Group’s wholesale customers. This year, we are reporting on the 52 weeks ended 30 May 2021 compared to 53 weeks to 31 May 2020 in the prior year. 
To provide a comparison with last year’s 53-week period, the unaudited contribution of the additional week in last year’s results was approximately 1% of 
revenue and profit.
Group gross margin of 49.0% was 1.7pts lower than the prior year. Gross margin was impacted by several headwinds over the Period: 
•	 Lower proportion of store sales in the Retail segment with stores closed for more than half of the Period and lower stores margin rate when open due to 
higher markdown sales in stores in Q1 and Q4 as stores cleared through pre-lockdown stock positions. Historically stores deliver a higher gross margin 
rate than other retail channels.

26
FINANCIAL REVIEW CONTINUED
•	 Increased freight costs as the result of disruption in global freight markets impacting inbound deliveries through the final quarter of the Period
•	 Increased duty and transportation costs for deliveries into EU markets following Brexit
PBT – before exceptional costs was £6.1 million against a loss of £(3.9) million in the prior period. The strong sales performance of our digital platform 
(e-commerce and ‘Friends of Joules’) and licensed product ranges, together with furlough scheme (CJRS) contributions, business rates relief and continued 
focus on managing costs more than offset the impact of lost revenue from the enforced closures of our own stores and those of many of our wholesale 
partners. Statutory PBT was £2.0 million against a Statutory loss before tax of £(24.8) million last year. Exceptional costs of £4.2 million (FY20: £21.0m) were 
incurred in the Period, primarily in relation to non-cash impairments of store lease right-of-use assets.
CHANNEL REVIEW – REVENUE AND MARGIN 
PERIOD ENDED 
£MILLION
MAY 2021
52 WEEKS
MAY 2020
53 WEEKS
VARIANCE %
  E-commerce
122.0
82.7
48%
  Stores
35.1
59.6
(41)%
  Shows
1.5
3.6
(59)%
Retail 
158.6
145.9
9%
Wholesale
35.3
42.7
(17)%
Other
5.1
2.2
130%
Group revenue
199.0
190.8
4%
Memo: International
25.0
29.5
(15)%
Gross margin %
49.0%
50.7%
  Retail 
52.3%
56.9%
  Wholesale 
26.8%
27.1%
RETAIL
‘Total Retail’ revenue of £158.6 million was 8.7% above the prior year (FY20: £145.9m) with strong e-commerce sales growth more than offsetting the impact 
of enforced store closures and the cancellation of country shows and events that the Group normally attends.
Joules retail revenue segment comprises:
•	 E-commerce: the sale of Joules and Garden Trading branded products through the Group’s own websites and via carefully selected third-party websites 
including Next, John Lewis, Zalando. Note, third-party ‘Friends of Joules’ products sold through the Joules website are reported within the ‘Other’ revenue 
segment based on the net commission received
•	 Stores: the sale of Joules branded products through the Group’s own retail stores and a small number of concessions with John Lewis for Joules 
womenswear
•	 Country shows and events: Joules has retail presence at events such as Badminton, Burghley and CarFest
E-COMMERCE 
Total e-commerce sales increased by 48% to £122.0 million (FY20: £82.7m). Excluding Garden Trading, e-commerce sales increased by 43%. This growth 
was led by sales through the Group’s own websites (joules.com, joulesusa.com, tomjoule.de and the Joules ebay store). E-commerce represented 77% of the 
Group’s retail revenue during the Period (FY20: 56%). 
Traffic to the Joules website was up by more than 47% and conversion rate also improved. This performance reflects the market-wide trend towards online 
shopping, as well as the Group’s:
•	 customer insight and digital marketing capability – to attract new customers to the brand and to provide compelling content and offers to existing 
customers. Digital active customers, those who have transacted online, increased to 1.3 million in the Period (FY20: 0.9 million), making up more than 
two-thirds of our total active customer base
•	 ongoing improvements to the online customer experience – including enhancements to site navigation, search and checkout experience
FINANCIAL REVIEW

27
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
•	 increasing range and breadth of products available on the Joules 
website, including more than 11,000 products from third party sellers via 
the Friends of Joules digital marketplace. Gross platform demand (which 
includes the sale of Joules products and the gross sales value from 
Friends of Joules) increased by nearly 50% in the Period 
•	 investment in warehousing and fulfilment capability over recent years
Garden Trading’s retail revenue, which is all e-commerce, for the post-
acquisition period was £4.3 million, this represents pro forma growth of over 
100% on the equivalent prior year period. This performance was a result of 
increased awareness of the brand, a growing active customer base – now 
at over 100,000, an expanded product collection and increased market 
demand for the home, garden and outdoor category. 
STORES
Overall store sales were £35.1 million in the year (FY20: £59.6m). This result 
reflects the forced closure of non-essential retail stores. In the current year, 
our stores were closed for more than half of the year compared with two 
months in the prior year. 
When allowed to open, stores traded at approximately 24% below the 
same period in FY19 and experienced reduced footfall against historic 
levels, in part the result of social distancing measures, the impact of which 
was partly offset by higher conversion rates.
WHOLESALE
Wholesale revenue in the Period was £35.3 million, a 17% reduction year 
on year (FY20: £42.7m), reflecting the ongoing impact of COVID-19 on 
many of the Group’s wholesale partners both in the UK and internationally. 
In the UK, wholesale revenue, excluding Garden Trading, was £15.2 million 
(FY20: £21.2m) with an approximately 40% reduction in Autumn/Winter 
2020 which was particularly impacted by COVID-19, and an improved 
trend in Spring/Summer 2021 which was in line with the prior equivalent 
season. Garden Trading wholesale revenue, for the post-acquisition period, 
was £4.4 million.
Internationally, our wholesale sales were £15.8 million (FY20: £21.5m). 
COVID-19 impacted all markets in the first quarter where we proactively 
cancelled or reduced a significant proportion of our early Autumn/Winter 
2020 deliveries across all markets. Despatches to Germany, along with 
other European markets, have continued to be impacted by lockdown 
measures and further impacted in the second half of the year by Brexit which 
has resulted in shipping and customs clearance delays.
OTHER REVENUE
Other revenue consists of royalties from the sale of licensed products sold 
within third-party partner channels and the commission received on the sale 
of Friends of Joules digital marketplace products. 
Other revenue more than doubled to £5.1 million (FY20: £2.2m). This 
reflects the strong growth of our Friends of Joules digital marketplace, 
contributing £2.0 million to other revenue (FY20: £0.4 million), and strong 
performance from several of our licensed product categories and partners.
Friends of Joules now has over 11,000 products, across 293 categories, 
from over 400 third party sellers. These products are merchandised 
alongside Joules products on the Joules websites and promoted to Joules’ 
growing active customer. 
INTERNATIONAL 
Total international revenue, which includes revenue in international markets 
across retail and wholesale channels, decreased by 15.2% to £25.0 million 
(FY20: £29.5 million) and now comprises 12.6% of the Group’s total revenue 
(FY20: 15.5%).
Wholesale sales were impacted by COVID-19 across all markets for the first 
quarter and in European markets through most of the year with national and 
regional lockdowns. European markets were further impacted by Brexit in the 
second half with disruption to delivery times.
Notwithstanding the specific challenges in the current Period, the Joules 
brand continues to resonate with customers in our target international 
markets. E-commerce sales continued to grow in the US and Germany, 
despite having to close our German market website for a five-week period 
to avoid the risk of disruption to customer orders in the initial weeks following 
Brexit. 
ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES 
Total administrative expenses before exceptional costs decreased by 9.2% 
to £89.8 million (FY20: £98.9m). 
 
 PERIOD ENDED 
£MILLION
MAY 2021
52 WEEKS
MAY 2020
53 WEEKS
Operating expenses 
72.1
79.8
Depreciation and amortisation*
16.0
19.5
Share-based compensation
1.7
(0.4)
Administrative expenses – before 
exceptional costs
89.8
98.9
Exceptional costs
4.2
21.0
Total Administrative expenses
93.9
119.9
* Depreciation of Right-of-Use asset was £8.0 million (FY20: 12.6 million)
OPERATING EXPENSES 
Operating expenses decreased by 9.7% to £72.1 million (FY20: £79.8 
million). The movement in the Period reflected the support received from the 
Government via the Job Retention Scheme (£4.6 million) and rates rebates 
(£2.3 million), as well as lower direct sales variable costs and the Group’s 
ongoing cost management. 
Sales costs which primarily relate to commissions paid to third-party retail 
partners and wholesale sales agents, decreased by 8.2% to £11.2 million 
(FY20: £12.2 million), in line with the lower third-party sales experienced in 
the Period.
Marketing expenditure was up by 22% to £11.3 million (FY20: £9.3m). 
Investment in digital and social marketing was increased to drive customer 
acquisition and digital sales, which was partly offset by the reduction in 
marketing expenditure in other channels.
FINANCIAL REVIEW

28
FINANCIAL REVIEW CONTINUED
Store costs decreased by 55% to £8.1 million (FY20: £17.9 million). 
Underlying store costs were mitigated by business rates relief and the 
payments received from the CJRS when store colleagues were furloughed. 
Store costs exclude rent expenditure which is accounted for under IFRS 16 
(Leases) with the exception of turnover only store rent and short-term leases 
of £0.4 million (FY20: £0.3 million).
Distribution costs increased by 35% to £12.4 million (FY20: £9.2 million). 
The increase in distribution costs is due to the increase in e-commerce sales 
and the resulting increase in variable warehouse related costs. 
Head office costs decreased by 6.7% to £29.1 million (FY20: £31.2 
million) as the result of continued cost management activities, CJRS income 
for furloughed colleagues and the constraints of the global pandemic 
reducing travel and related costs.
DEPRECIATION AND AMORTISATION 
Depreciation and amortisation reduced by £3.4 million to £16.0 million 
(FY20: £19.4m), with lower right-of-use asset depreciation more than 
offsetting an increase in underlying depreciation and amortisation. 
Underlying depreciation and amortisation increased to £8.0 million (FY20: 
£6.8 million) the increase being primarily due to higher amortisation 
following the completion of a number of technology initiatives in the prior 
financial year, including further developments to our digital platform, the 
launch of the ‘Friends of Joules’ digital marketplace and roll-out of a new 
digitally integrated store point of sales solution.
Right-of-use asset depreciation decreased by £4.6 million to £8.0 million 
(FY20: £12.6 million). The decrease was the result of a reduction in the 
right-of-use asset following impairment write-downs in the prior financial 
period and the renegotiation of several leases in the period which resulted in 
reductions in underlying lease costs and several leases falling outside of the 
scope of IFRS 16. This was partly offset by a lease extension for our UK 
warehouse. 
SHARE-BASED COMPENSATION
Share-based compensation was £1.7 million in the Period (FY20: £0.4m 
income). 
In the current Period, the Executive Directors and several senior executives, 
waived options outstanding under the Long Term Incentive Plans (‘LTIPs’) due 
to vest following the three-year periods ending FY21 and FY22, reducing the 
number of shares under option and the share based compensation provision. 
Several new share plan arrangements were established in the Period, 
including a new LTIP for the three-year period to FY23 and an All Employee 
Share Plan. 
Share-based compensation in each period can fluctuate based on 
projected performance outcomes against the LTIP targets, the share price at 
reporting date and movement in the charge required for National Insurance 
contributions. 
EXCEPTIONAL ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSE
A total exceptional expense of £4.2 million (FY20: £21.0m) has been 
booked by the Group in the Period as detailed below and in Note 4 of the 
Consolidated Financial Statements.
PERIOD ENDED
£MILLION
MAY 21
MAY 20
Right-of-use asset – impairment
1.8
16.2
Property, plant and equipment and 
intangible assets – impairment
1.1
4.3
Non-cash exceptional
2.9
20.5
Acquisition costs
0.6
nil
Restructuring costs
0.7
0.5
Other exceptional costs
1.3
0.5
Total exceptional costs
4.2
21.0
The Group regularly conducts a review of its assets to identify if there are 
any impairments to the carrying value of the assets. Following this review at 
the Period end, a non-cash exceptional impairment charge of £2.9 million 
has been recognised (FY20: £20.5m), which is net of prior year impairment 
charge reversals of £0.8 million (FY20: nil), the majority of which relates to 
the Group’s stores. The stores with impairment reversals were written back to 
their recoverable amount after a thorough review of forecast performance 
on a store-by-store basis to determine which impairment reversals were 
appropriate to recognise.
The COVID-19 pandemic and the resulting enforced closure of the Group’s 
retail stores and anticipated lower footfall to retail stores when reopened, 
results in lower cash flow forecasts for stores and a resulting impairment to 
the right-of-use asset and fixed assets of certain stores. 
In the second half of the year the Group incurred further exceptional costs of 
£1.3 million, of which £0.6 million were professional fees related to the 
acquisition of Garden Trading, and £0.7 million were restructuring costs 
(FY20: £0.5 million). The restructuring costs related to a re-organisation of 
structures across the Group’s head office functions which commenced in 
FY20 and was completed in the Period as part of the ‘Joules Blueprint’ 
business strategy to review organisational design and introduce clarity 
around roles and responsibilities.
FINANCE COSTS
Net finance costs were £1.6 million (FY20: £1.8 million). Net finance costs 
consist of £0.4 million interest and facility charges on the Group’s revolving 
credit facility and term loan with Barclays Bank PLC (FY20: £0.4 million) and 
£1.2 million interest on lease liabilities (FY20: £1.4 million).
FINANCIAL REVIEW

29
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
TAXATION
The Group tax charge for the Period was £1.1 million (FY20: £4.6 million 
credit). The effective tax rate for the Period was 78.1% (FY20: 17.8%), which 
was significantly higher than the applicable UK corporation tax rate due to 
the impact of recalculating the deferred tax liability on Garden Trading 
intangibles (following the UK tax rate being increased from 19% to 25% from 
April 2023), plus non-deductible expenditure (including £0.6m of Garden 
Trading acquisition costs), share based compensation charges and a prior 
year deferred tax charge, mostly arising on fixed asset timing differences.
CASH FLOW 
Free cash flow, prior to the capital expenditure on our new head office 
development and the acquisition consideration for Garden Trading, was 
£11.1 million inflow in the period (FY20: £7.3 million outflow). Net cash flow 
after the capital expenditure on the new head office, the acquisition 
consideration for Garden Trading and the repayment of borrowings was 
£7.0 million outflow in the Period (FY20: £10.1 million outflow).
The improvement against the comparable period reflects higher EBITDA for 
the trading reasons detailed above and the benefit of the Government’s 
COVID-19 support measures; the receipt of corporation tax overpaid on 
account in the prior year; deferral of a proportion of lease rental payments 
in agreement with landlords; and, continued robust working capital 
management.
£MILLION
FY21
FY20
EBITDA (before exceptional costs)
23.7
17.4
Share-based compensation
1.7
(0.4)
Lease repayments – IFRS 16
(11.3)
(12.3)
Cash exceptional costs
(1.3)
(0.5)
Net working capital – change
4.3
(2.4)
Operating free cash flow
17.1
1.8
Interest paid – borrowings 
(0.3)
(0.4)
Interest paid – lease liability
(1.2)
(1.4)
Tax received/(paid)
3.0
(0.9)
Cash from Operating activities
18.6
(0.9)
Capital expenditure – core
(7.5)
(6.4)
Free cash flow (core capex)
11.1
(7.3)
Capital expenditure – new head office
(6.1)
(7.3)
Acquisition of Garden Trading
(4.2)
-
Free cash flow
(0.8)
(14.6)
Net cash from financing
(7.8)
24.7
Net cash flow
(7.0)
(10.1)
Memo: Total capital expenditure
(13.6)
(13.7)
Net cash
4.1
4.5
CAPITAL EXPENDITURE
Core capital expenditure in the year was £7.5 million (FY20: £6.4m). Major 
areas of capital expenditure included a capacity upgrade programme at 
our UK warehouse, alongside developments to the Joules website and other 
core technology platforms.
The development of our new head office, The Joules Barn, was completed in 
June 2021. During the Period, capital expenditure on the new head office 
was £6.1million (FY20: £7.3m).
INVENTORY 
Group Inventory at the end of the Period was £47.5 million (FY19: £35.3m). 
The increase in the Period is due in part to the acquisition of Garden Trading 
as well as an increased holding of current and future season inventory with 
last year impacted by actions taken to rephase stock levels due to the 
closure of the Group’s stores during the UK’s initial lockdown.
DIVIDEND
Given the impact of the global pandemic on the Group and the continued 
uncertain outlook, the Board has not declared a dividend in respect of the 
current financial period (FY20: £nil). The Board will continue to review the 
financial position of the Group and intends to recommence dividend 
payments when it is considered financially appropriate to do so.
NET CASH AND LIQUIDITY 
Net cash at the end of the Period was £4.1 million (FY20: £4.5 million) 
representing cash of £18.0 million (FY20: £26.2 million) and borrowings of 
£13.9 million (FY20: £21.7 million). 
The Group’s total liquidity headroom at 30 May 2021 was £38.1 million 
(FY20: £52.5m), comprising £18.0 million cash balances (FY20: £26.2m)
and £20.1 million undrawn committed financing facilities (FY20: £26.3m). 
The decrease in liquidity headroom is driven by the Group not seeking an 
extension to its temporary 12 month, £15 million revolving credit facility with 
Barclays Bank PLC (which was put in place in April 2020 and expired in 
April 2021), and the investment in Garden Trading during the Period.
FINANCIAL REVIEW

30
FINANCIAL REVIEW CONTINUED
LEASE LIABILITY (IFRS 16)
The Group’s total lease liability at 30 May 2021 was £39.8 million, 
a reduction of £6.9 million since the year ended 31 May 2020.
The repayment of lease liabilities of £11.3 million in the Period was partly 
offset by lease additions of £4.3 million, primarily relating to a lease 
extension for the Group’s UK distribution centre, the renegotiation of certain 
store leases on more favourable terms and the addition of the lease for 
Garden Trading’s warehouse and showroom.
LEASE LIABILITY BY 
TYPE:
£MILLION
30 MAY 2021 31 MAY 2020
INCREASE/
(DECREASE)
Store leases
31.8
37.7
(5.9)
Commercial property 
leases
7.4
8.3
(0.9)
Other leases
0.6
0.7
(0.1)
Total liability
39.8
46.7
(6.9)
FINANCING FACILITIES 
At the end of the Period the Group had total available facilities of £34.0 
million of which £13.9 million was drawn.
FACILITY
£MILLION
AVAILABLE 
FACILITY 
MAY 2021
DRAWN 
FACILITY
 MAY 2021
MATURITY
Revolving credit facility 
(‘RCF’)
25.0
5.1
September 
2024
Term loan
9.0
8.8
September 
2024
Total facilities/
borrowings
34.0
13.9
The Group has a £25 million revolving credit facility provided by Barclays 
Bank PLC (‘Barclays’) to fund seasonal working capital requirements. In April 
2021, the Group agreed an extension of this facility with Barclays, extending 
the maturity date from July 2022 to September 2024. 
In April 2020, the Group established an additional short-term revolving 
credit facility of £15 million with Barclays, to provide additional financial 
headroom over the year to March 2021. This facility has not been renewed 
by the Group.
The development of the Group’s new head office, which is now complete, is 
part funded through a £9.0 million loan from Barclays. The loan is repayable 
by way of quarterly payments of £264,000 and a final bullet payment in 
September 2024.
EARNINGS PER SHARE
Statutory basic earnings per share for the Period, were 0.82 pence (FY20: 
loss per share 21.61 pence). The weighted number of Ordinary Shares in 
issue for the Period was 109 million an increase of 15 million Ordinary 
Shares compared to the prior period. The increase in Ordinary Shares 
follows the equity placing completed in April 2020 and the share 
consideration element of the Garden Trading acquisition in February 2021.
BREXIT
The Group was well prepared for the additional operational and 
administrative requirements that came into effect at the end of the transitional 
arrangement with the EU on 1 January 2021. Notwithstanding this 
preparation, the Group’s sales to EU customers, wholesale and consumers, 
were impacted by logistics disruption and higher costs to serve, including 
higher courier costs, duty and other taxes. The total impact to profit in the 
Period is estimated at £0.8 to £1.0 million against the comparable period.
After several months of trading under the new arrangements, the logistics 
challenges are starting to normalise, but the increased costs are anticipated 
to only partly revert to historic levels. The Group will continue to evaluate 
and implement options to mitigate the adverse impact including a potential 
increase in selling prices and structural changes to the Group’s logistics.
GOING CONCERN AND VIABILITY STATEMENT – IMPACT 
OF COVID-19
As for many businesses in the retail sector, the Group has continued to be 
significantly impacted by COVID-19 during the Period. The impact, and 
management’s response, is set out in further detail within the CEO’s report 
and the Financial Review. 
Despite the easing of the UK’s lockdown and the re-opening of non-
essential retail in mid-April 2021, the retail sector continues to face 
significant uncertainties, including short-term and potentially more 
fundamental long-term changes in consumer behaviour as well as the 
potential for ongoing operational disruption. Given these uncertainties, the 
Directors have undertaken a comprehensive assessment to consider the 
going concern and longer-term viability of the Group and Company. In 
making their assessment the Directors have considered the following: 
•	 The Group’s financial position, as at the date of this report, and its 
committed borrowing facilities available for the time period under 
consideration 
•	 The support from the Group’s shareholders and bank, including the 
successful equity placing that was completed in the early stages of the 
UK lockdown during the prior period and the financing facility extension 
that was completed in April 2021 
•	 Alternative sources of financing, including sale & leaseback of freehold 
property and asset financing that might reasonably be assumed to be 
available to the Group – noting that any financing from these sources 
has not been included within the forecasts that support the going concern 
assessment 
•	 Financial commitments, including capital commitments, lease 
commitments, stock purchases and other non-variable/non-discretionary 
costs. In respect of property leases, the Directors note the relatively short 
lease commitments, of less than three years on average, that the Group 
has across its store portfolio together with recent and ongoing progress 
on renewing leases on favourable terms 
•	 The extent of potential Government support initiatives including business 
rates relief and the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) 
•	 Strength of brand, reflected in active customer growth, brand awareness 
and brand health metrics – as detailed more fully in the Strategic Review 
FINANCIAL REVIEW

31
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
•	 The flexibility and agility of the Group’s business model, as described in 
the Strategic Review, noting that over two thirds of the Group’s retail 
sales are via e-commerce and that the Group has diversified sources of 
revenue, operating across several channels and geographic markets, 
with owned and third-party channels including wholesale and 
marketplaces. Newer income streams of brand licensing and the Group’s 
Friends of Joules digital marketplace and from Garden Trading following 
the acquisition in February 2021 provide additional comfort on the 
strength of the brand and diversity of income channels.
The Directors have also considered the trading performance of the Group’s 
stores as they have re-opened following the easing of the UK’s lockdown 
restrictions on 12 April 2021, as well as the performance of the Group’s 
e-commerce channel, which has continued to exceed management’s 
expectations during the Period. 
The Directors have reviewed management’s business plan forecasts that 
cover the period to 26 May 2024, being the Group’s strategic plan horizon. 
The forecasts have been produced on the following basis: 
•	 Base plan – a gradual sales recovery post the end of the UK’s third 
lockdown in April 2021, continuing the trend experienced since the UK’s 
lockdown restrictions were eased in mid-April 2021, reflecting 
management’s estimates for the speed and extent of recovery across its 
different sales channels and markets. It reflects stores being open 
throughout the period under review initially trading significantly below 
the comparative pre-COVID-19 period, improving to approximately 
80% of pre-COVID-19 sales levels by the end of FY22, with modest 
growth thereafter. Third-party wholesale channels are assumed to follow 
a similar trajectory. The Group’s e-commerce sales are forecast to grow 
at double-digit levels reflecting performance over recent years and 
experienced during the UK’s latest lockdown in January to March 2021. 
•	 Downside scenario – the ‘Base plan’ adjusted to reflect a further UK 
lockdown for three months during October to December 2021 with all 
non-essential retail closed during the Group’s key trading period, 
followed by a much slower recovery of the Group’s stores channel with 
total store revenues only achieving approximately 60% of the pre-
COVID-19 levels by the end of FY24. E-commerce sales growth is 
assumed to be at half of the ‘Base plan’ levels and wholesale sales are 
assumed to reduce significantly during FY22 compared to the 
‘Base plan’.
Within each forecast, management have reflected financial commitments 
and the impact of realised or anticipated cost savings from discretionary and 
variable costs. No Government support or subsidies, other than those 
announced and committed at the date of this report, are included. 
The Directors have also stress tested the forecast to consider situations under 
which the Company would have insufficient liquidity under its current 
secured borrowing facilities and/or it would not meet its banking covenant 
tests. One such ‘Stress test scenario’ is that of an even further extended 
potential COVID-19 related lockdown in the UK for up to six months, with a 
material disruption to retail store operations during the full peak Autumn/
Winter 2021 trading season resulting in significantly reduced store channel 
revenue and lower receipts from the Group’s wholesale channels. The Stress 
test scenario assumes e-commerce revenue growth in line with the 
‘Downside scenario’ noting that loyal customers would no longer be able to 
access the brand via the store environment – as demonstrated during the 
previous UK lockdowns, plus ongoing income from Garden Trading, brand 
licensing and digital marketplace activities which was in excess of £25 
million in FY21. The Stress test scenario assumes that the Group would only 
reduce directly related variable sales costs during the period and does not 
assume any further cost mitigation actions which would be available to the 
Group. No additional Government support or subsidies to offset costs or 
support cash flow are assumed in this scenario. 
The Directors believe, with reference to the considerations noted above, that, 
firstly the likelihood of this situation arising in its most extreme form is remote 
and, secondly, that they anticipate that the Group would be able to adapt 
and respond to mitigate the impacts and continue to trade and meet its 
obligations through the period of consideration. 
GOING CONCERN
The Base plan and Downside scenario forecasts indicate that the Group will 
remain within its available committed borrowing facilities and in compliance 
with covenants throughout the forthcoming 12-month period. Under the 
Downside scenario, the Group has more than £20 million available liquidity 
headroom through-out the period under consideration and has EBITDA 
headroom of £2.7 million against its May 2022 year end covenant test and 
headroom of £5.6 million at its first covenant test in the period at the end of 
November 2021. 
The Group would also remain within its borrowing facilities and comply with 
covenants under the Stress test through this period. 
Following consideration of these forecasts and having made appropriate 
enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company 
has adequate resources to continue in operational existence until at least 12 
months after the approval of the Financial Statements. Therefore, the 
Directors continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in 
preparing the Consolidated Financial Statements. 
VIABILITY STATEMENT 
The Directors have considered the Group’s prospects and viability over a 
three-year period to 26 May 2024. This three-year period is considered 
appropriate as i) this is the Group’s longer term strategic planning period 
and ii) the Group’s £25 million revolving credit facility with Barclays Bank 
PLC, has recently been extended out to September 2024 which covers the 
three-year period of the review. 
As set out in detail in the ‘Going concern and viability statement – impact of 
COVID-19’ section above, the Directors have produced and reviewed 
forecasts which consider the impact of further UK lockdowns (of both 3- and 
6-month periods), slow recovery thereafter and no additional Government 
support or subsidies.
Under the Base plan and the Downside scenarios, outlined in more detail 
above, the Group will remain within its available committed borrowing 
facilities and in compliance with covenants throughout the forecast period. 
Based on this assessment, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that 
the Group will continue in operation and meet all its liabilities as they fall 
during the period up to 26 May 2024.
FINANCIAL REVIEW

32
PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES
PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES
Set out below are the principal risks and uncertainties that the Directors consider could impact the business. 
The Board regularly reviews the potential risks facing the Group and the controls in place to mitigate any 
potential adverse impacts. The Board also recognises that the nature and scope of risks can change and 
that there may be other risks to which the Group is exposed and so the list is not intended to be exhaustive.
The Corporate Governance Report includes an overview of our approach to risk management and internal control systems and processes.
EXTERNAL RISKS
External risks reflect those risks where we are unable to influence the likelihood of the risk arising and therefore focus is on minimising the impact should the 
risk arise.
RISK AND IMPACT
MITIGATING FACTORS
 GLOBAL/REGIONAL PANDEMIC (I.E. COVID-19)
As the current global pandemic COVID-19 has shown, the implications of 
such an event are extreme, sudden and are challenging to mitigate. The 
impacts of a global (or regional) pandemic include:
•	 Supply chain disruption – supplier factory closures and freight disruption
•	 Customer demand reduction – general consumer mobility restrictions 
exacerbated by enforced store closures and/or in-store restrictions
•	 Supplier impact – increased risk of failure of key suppliers 
•	 Employee – health and wellbeing implications plus restrictions on ability 
to undertake day-to-day operations
•	 Management decision making – potential to be impacted if several 
members of the senior leadership team were to become incapacitated.
Our response to mitigate the immediate and longer-term impacts of 
COVID-19 are detailed within the CEO’s Report and Financial Review. 
As evidenced by COVID-19, mitigation of the impacts of a global 
pandemic is very challenging. To navigate the challenges and mitigate the 
potential adverse impacts on the Group, the following have been well 
established across the business:
•	 Business Continuity task force, with delegated decision-making 
authority, established to rapidly respond to and manage through crisis 
situations
•	 Well invested, modern IT infrastructure to support remote and agile 
working
•	 Ongoing investment in the Group’s digital platforms and warehouse 
fulfilment capabilities to ensure customer demand and delivery 
proposition are met
•	 Ongoing geographic diversification of supplier base and enhanced 
supplier due diligence 
•	 Short lease terms across store portfolio mitigating adverse financial 
impact of customer demand reduction
•	 Outsourced UK distribution centre operations to Clipper Logistics plc 
providing access to their disaster recovery capability and capacity.
ECONOMY
The majority of the Group’s revenue is generated from sales in the UK to UK 
customers. A deterioration in the UK economy may adversely impact 
consumer confidence and spending on discretionary items. A reduction in 
consumer expenditure could materially and adversely affect the Group’s 
financial condition, operations and business prospects.
Any significant change in inflation rates in the UK economy could further 
impact on consumer expenditure and increase the economic risk.
COVID-19 is also increasing the likelihood and impact of this risk.
As a premium lifestyle brand with a strong e-commerce channel, a 
geographically disperse retail store portfolio and long-standing wholesale 
customer accounts, the Directors consider that the UK business would be 
less affected by a reduction in consumer expenditure than many other 
clothing retailers.
In addition, the property portfolio has short lease terms, providing relative 
flexibility to close or relocate stores should this become necessary.

33
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES
RISK AND IMPACT
MITIGATING FACTORS
COMPETITOR ACTIONS
New competitors, existing clothing retailers or lifestyle brands may target 
our segment of the market. Existing competitors may increase their level of 
discounting or promotions and/or expand their presence in new channels. 
These actions could adversely impact our sales and profits.
Joules differentiates from competitors through its strong brand and products 
that are known for their quality, details, colour and prints. Our large 
customer database allows the Group to communicate effectively with 
customers, developing customer engagement and loyalty.
The expansion of the Group’s product and category offer and the 
diversification of revenue sources, with new income streams from the 
Group’s Friends of Joules market place, Joules branded licence 
arrangements and following the acquisition of Garden Trading in the 
Period, help to mitigate this risk.
FOREIGN EXCHANGE
The Group purchases the majority of its product inventory from overseas 
and is therefore exposed to foreign currency risk, primarily the US Dollar.
Without mitigation, input costs may fluctuate in the short term, creating 
uncertainty as to profits and cash flows.
Brexit has increased volatility in this area that may be sustained or worsen 
going forward.
The Group’s Treasury Policy sets out the parameters and procedures 
relating to foreign currency hedging. We currently seek to hedge a material 
proportion of forecasted US Dollar requirement 12–24 months ahead using 
forward contracts.
The Group’s US wholesale business generates US Dollar cash flows which 
provide a degree of natural hedging.
REGULATORY AND POLITICAL
New regulations or compliance requirements may be introduced from time 
to time. These may have a material impact on the cost base or operational 
complexity of the business. Non-compliance with the regulation could result 
in financial penalties.
Recent and ongoing US/China trade negotiations with the threat of 
additional US tariffs on China manufactured products, as well as the 
continuing uncertainty surrounding Brexit, have increased the risk and 
uncertainty in this area. 
The Group has processes in place to monitor and report to the Board on 
new regulations and compliance requirements that could have an impact on 
the business. The impact of any new regulation is evaluated and reflected in 
the Group’s financial forecasts and planning.
The Group is seeking to diversify its supplier base to help mitigate this risk.

34
PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES CONTINUED
RISK AND IMPACT
MITIGATING FACTORS
BREXIT
The exit of the UK from the EU has added complexity across many areas of 
the Group’s operations that impacted on our ability to get products to 
customers in a timely manner and on product profit margins. 
Specific risk areas that are associated with the UK’s exit from the EU 
include:
•	 Political uncertainty: The level of economic and consumer uncertainty 
has increased due to the UK’s exit from the EU. 
•	 Changes in customs duty and VAT regimes: Goods being imported to 
and exported from the EU are subject to a different duty and VAT 
regime, which results in increased costs to the Group.
•	 Additional paperwork and administration are also required in order to 
move product into and out of both the UK and the EU.
•	 Supply chain costs and delays: Brexit, combined with the impact of the 
COVID-19 pandemic, has had a significant impact on global supply 
chains resulting in both disruption and significant cost increases 
associated with the inbound and outbound movements of goods. 
•	 Employment of EU nationals: EU nationals living in the UK no longer 
have automatic rights to remain working in the UK. This could restrict the 
Group’s ability to retain and recruit appropriate talent. 
•	 Foreign exchange fluctuations: The Group’s exposure to fluctuations in 
foreign exchange rates, in particular the strength of Sterling relative to 
the US Dollar, is increased as a result of the impact of Brexit. 
•	 Regulation and compliance: The regulatory regime applicable to the 
manufacture and sale of products may increase in complexity if the UK 
adopts a different framework from the current EU based legislation.
The Group has a Brexit ‘task force’ that was originally established to 
undertake contingency planning for a potential ‘no deal’ Brexit. The Brexit 
task force has continued to monitor the impact on the Group now that the 
UK has left the EU and has been managing the immediate challenges on 
the Group’s operations whilst also seeking to optimise the Group’s future 
structure and trading relationships with EU partners. 
Mitigating steps taken:
•	 Political uncertainty: The Directors and Brexit task force continue to 
monitor the impact of ongoing changes. 
•	 Changes in customs duty and VAT regimes: An assessment of the 
Group’s operations was undertaken to identify changes required and 
any additional costs. 
•	 Paperwork (e.g. commercial invoices) has been automated to improve 
efficiency where possible. 
•	 Supply chain delays: The business has achieved Authorised Economic 
Operator status and has implemented Customs bonded status for the 
Group’s main UK distribution centre which assist in mitigating the 
adverse duty impacts and supply chain delays. This area is under 
ongoing review to improve efficiency of the Group’s operations.
•	 Employment of EU nationals: All EU nationals working for the Group 
have been consulted on the implications of Brexit and support continues 
to be provided with applying for settled status. 
•	 Foreign exchange fluctuations: As noted above the Group seeks to 
hedge a material proportion of forecasted US Dollar requirement 
12–24 months ahead using forward contracts.
•	 Regulation and compliance: Ongoing legal advice is being taken in this 
area to ensure continued compliance with relevant UK and EU 
regulations.
PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES

35
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
INTERNAL RISKS
Internal risks reflect those where we can influence the likelihood of the risk arising and the impact should the risk arise.
RISK AND IMPACT
MITIGATING FACTORS
BRAND AND REPUTATION
The strength of our brand and its reputation are very important to the 
success of the Group.
Failure to protect and manage this could reduce the confidence and 
trust that customers place in the business, which could have a 
detrimental impact on sales, profits and business prospects. Our 
brand may be undermined or damaged by our actions or those of 
our partners or through infringement of our intellectual property (‘IP’).
Brand and reputation are monitored closely by senior management and the 
Board. The Group’s public relations are actively managed and customer 
feedback, both direct and indirect, is carefully monitored.
We carefully consider each new trade customer with whom we do business and 
monitor on an ongoing basis. 
We actively monitor for potential IP infringements and have a process to 
determine the appropriate course of action to protect our brand and IP vigorously. 
PRODUCT SOURCING
The Group’s products are predominantly manufactured overseas. 
Failure to carry out sufficient due diligence and to act in the event of 
any negative findings, especially in relation to ethical or quality 
related issues, could adversely impact our brand and reputation.	
The Group has a policy and process for the selection of new suppliers. 
This includes a review of compliance with laws and regulations and that suppliers 
meet generally accepted standards of good practice. In addition, suppliers are 
required to sign up to the Joules code of conduct.
The Group operates a programme of ethical audits across the product supply 
base supported by a third-party agency.
DESIGN
As with all clothing and lifestyle brands there is a risk that our offer 
will not satisfy the needs of our customers or that we fail to correctly 
identify trends that are important to our customer base. These 
outcomes may result in lower sales, excess inventories and/or higher 
markdowns.
Joules has a long established in-house creative and design team who have a high 
level of awareness and understanding of our target customer segment. A large 
proportion of our product range is anchored in classic products that are evolved 
season to season.
Early feedback from our trade customers can allow us to further refine our product 
range ahead of significant purchase commitments.
KEY MANAGEMENT
Our business performance is linked to the performance of our people 
and to the leadership of key individuals. The loss of a key individual 
whether at management level or within a specialist skill set could 
have a detrimental effect on our operations and, in some cases, the 
creative vision for the brand.
The Group’s remuneration policy, which includes a long-term incentive scheme 
and performance-related pay, is designed to attract and retain key management. 
The Group operates learning and development programmes to increase the 
opportunities for internal succession.
IT SECURITY AND SYSTEMS AVAILABILITY
Non-availability of the Group’s IT systems, including the e-commerce 
websites, for a prolonged period could result in business disruption, 
loss of sales and reputational damage.
Malicious attacks, data breaches or viruses could lead to business interruption 
and reputational damage. A business continuity plan exists to minimise the impact 
of a loss of key systems and to recover the use of the system and associated data. 
A regular assessment of vulnerability to malicious attacks is performed and any 
weaknesses rectified. All Group employees are made aware of the Group’s IT 
security policies and we deploy a suite of tools (including email filtering and 
antivirus software) to protect against such events.
SUPPLY CHAIN
The disruption to any material element of the Group’s supply chain, in 
particular the UK central distribution centre (‘UK DC’), could impact 
sales and impact on our ability to supply our consumers, stores and 
wholesale customers. 	
The Group outsourced its UK DC operations to Clipper Logistics plc (‘Clipper’) in 
the prior period, this provides access to Clipper’s business continuity 
arrangements in the event of the loss of the UK distribution centre. 
In addition, the Group maintains insurance cover at an appropriate level to 
protect against the impact of such an interruption.
GARDEN TRADING ACQUISITION AND INTEGRATION 
During the Period the Group acquired 100% of the share capital of 
The Garden Trading Company Limited. Significant financial 
investment has been made in the acquisition and the successful 
integration and development of the Garden Trading business will be 
key for the delivery of the Group’s overall strategy. 
At the same time as undertaking extensive financial, legal and operational due 
diligence prior to the acquisition, the Group also established an integration project 
team that has continued to be focused post-acquisition on delivering a successful 
transition of Garden Trading into the Joules Group.
The Directors are working closely with the management team at Garden Trading to 
monitor the current and future trading performance of the business.
 
PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES

36
RESPONSIBLY JOULES
“From the day we started with nothing more than a 
table in a field, to the Joules you know and love 
today, we’ve always been conscious of our impact on 
the environment, the wildlife within it and the people 
we work with. That’s why we’re committed to 
protecting, respecting and giving back — because 
we wouldn’t be us without them”
UNITED NATIONS 
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 
GOALS ALIGNMENT
The United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (‘SDGs’) are a 
universal urgent call to action to end poverty, protect the planet and 
improve the lives and prospects of everyone, everywhere. Launched in 
2015 and targeting 2030, the goals cover the three dimensions of 
sustainable development: economic growth, social inclusion and 
environmental protection.
We use these goals as a blueprint for our Responsibly Joules strategy, 
focusing on the ones that are most relevant to our industry and our 
business, and where we can make the most positive impact.
To guide us on our journey, we have four pillars that outline everything 
we stand for and everything we’re working towards; Sustainable 
Sourcing, Respecting our Environment, Charitably Joules and Our 
Joules Family. 
The next page of this Report gives a brief introduction to each of the 
four pillars, and the remainder of this Report goes into further detail in 
respect of each pillar. In each section we have referenced the SDGs 
that we are aligning with for each pillar.

37
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
RESPONSIBLY JOULES
SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
RESPONSIBLY JOULES
RESPONSIBLY JOULES STRATEGY 
Our Responsibly Joules strategy sets out our approach to corporate social 
responsibility, reflecting on how we want our business to operate; fairly, 
responsibly, and sustainably. We work hard to make sure that what we do is 
right – not just for us, but also for the people we work with, the communities 
we’re based in, and the world around us. We are committed to ‘fighting for 
the environment’ in everything that we do and therefore are implementing 
targets and processes to ensure we meet the best possible social and 
environmental standards over the coming years. 
GOVERNANCE
Our Responsibly Joules strategy is driven by our steering group, comprising; 
•	 Our dedicated Responsibly Joules team 
•	 Directors and stakeholders from across the business. 
It is chaired by our Commercial Director and reports directly into our 
Operating Board and the Group PLC Board. This structure ensures that our 
Responsibly Joules strategy aligns with our broader corporate strategy and 
is disseminated through the business so that it is at the heart of everything that 
we do. 
HIGHLIGHTS
•	 In May 2021 we established a new ESG-linked financing facility with 
Barclays Bank PLC, linking our financing agreement to our performance 
against three Sustainability Performance Targets (SPTs) aligned with our 
Responsibly Joules work. 
•	 We took part in the Material Change Index, published in May 2021, 
and achieved ‘Level 3 – Maturing’ status, recognising Joules as an 
emerging leader in sustainable materials sourcing.
•	 Introduced our ‘Joules Blueprint’ to create clarity about the direction of 
the business and the part that each individual has to play in that, 
improving colleague engagement and collaboration.
WE PLAN, MANAGE AND REPORT OUR RESPONSIBLY JOULES PROGRESS UNDER FOUR PILLARS:
RESPECTING OUR 
ENVIRONMENT
SUSTAINABLE 
SOURCING 
Partnering with our suppliers 
to create distinctive products 
made with care, 
consideration and respect
Managing and reducing our 
impact on the environment 
and protecting it for future 
generations
Championing the causes 
close to our hearts by 
inspiring and generating 
positive change to make 
a real difference 
Creating a vibrant and 
supportive team that live and 
breathe our values every 
day
CHARITABLY 
JOULES
OUR JOULES 
FAMILY
“DOING THE RIGHT THING”
“GIVING SOMETHING BACK”

38
PILLAR 1: SUSTAINABLE 
SOURCING
RESPONSIBLY JOULES CONTINUED
ETHICAL SOURCING 
Ethical trading is an integral part of our Responsibly Joules commitments. 
To ensure we deliver the very best quality products, we work with suppliers 
based in countries across the world. All our suppliers must comply with our 
Ethical Trading Policy based on guidelines set out by the Ethical Trading 
Initiative (‘ETI’) and the Base Code of Labour Standards as supported by 
the UN International Labour Organisation (‘UN ILO’).
ETHICAL TRADING POLICY UPDATE
In February, we updated and relaunched our ethical trading policy (the 
‘Policy’) at our virtual supplier conference. The updated Policy demonstrates 
our commitments to minimise the social and ethical impact of our business, 
outlines our expectations for our suppliers and strategic partners, and is 
aligned with industry best practice and the most widely recognised industry 
guidance on ethical trade.
Alongside our updated Policy we have also realigned our ethical trading 
processes in the last year to ensure compliance with this Policy is upheld. 
All suppliers of Joules products are independently audited annually against 
legal requirements and the ETI Base Code using SMETA or BSCI audit 
methodologies. Suppliers are graded based on these audit results and this 
information is used by our buying, sourcing and ethical teams to access 
supply chain performance and aid decision making. Joules works closely 
with all suppliers to support them to make continuous improvements and new 
suppliers are thoroughly assessed and evaluated as part of an onboarding 
process.
ETHICAL TRADING INITIATIVE (ETI) PROGRESS
We are proud members of the Ethical Trading Initiative (‘ETI’), an alliance of 
companies and voluntary organisations working to improve the lives of 
workers worldwide. As members of the ETI we commit to acting responsibly 
and promoting decent work. 
Unfortunately, due to the global COVID-19 pandemic our ETI annual 
reporting and therefore graduation to full membership was postponed. 
However, in June 2020 we completed the ETI Enhanced Expectations survey 
which was established to ensure workers’ rights were maintained during the 
pandemic. We also continued to prioritise our work with the ETI as a 
foundation member to meet requirements needed and are hoping to 
graduate to full membership in the coming months. 
Sustainable sourcing is about understanding and improving the social and 
environmental impacts of our products and the processes used to make them. 
This includes moving to more sustainable materials, reducing our use of 
resources and ensuring that all our suppliers adhere to our strict ethical 
trading policy.
Our Sustainable Sourcing strategy defines how we are working to make our 
products and manage our supply chain better, so that we are not only 
minimising the negative impact of our operations but we are also working 
towards having a positive impact for the future.
1
ACHIEVEMENTS THIS YEAR INCLUDE:
•	 We launched our sustainable materials strategy and targets in September 2020 
and achieved ‘Level 3 – Maturing’ status in the Material Change Index published 
in May 2021, recognising Joules as an emerging leader in sustainable materials 
sourcing. 
•	 In FY21 46% of the total consumption of our key raw materials came from more 
sustainable sources, up from 17% in FY20, +169% vs LY. 
•	 In FY21 78% of our total cotton consumption was sourced as more sustainable 
through the Better Cotton Initiative (BCI) and organic cotton, +130% vs LY. 
•	 We made significant ethical compliance improvements; relaunching our Ethical 
Trading Policy, continuing our work with the Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI) and 
launching a pilot with transparency tool TrusTrace to improve supply chain 
traceability. 
FOCUS AREAS FOR THE YEAR AHEAD:
•	 We are working towards graduation to full Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI) 
membership in the coming months, validating the work we have done over 
the past year and guiding our ethical compliance future strategy. 
•	 Commitment to map all tier 2 suppliers by the end of FY22 with the support 
of supply chain transparency tool TrusTrace. 
•	 Continue to work towards our sustainable materials targets for end of 2022, 
building on the great work achieved for cotton and leather to increase our use 
of sustainable materials for our other key materials including polyester, viscose 
and wool. 
•	 Start work on measuring the indirect carbon impact from our supply chain, 
working with our suppliers and strategic partners to reduce our impact on 
the climate. 
RESPONSIBLY JOULES

39
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
COVID-19 ETHICAL SOURCING RESPONSE
We are proud to be signatories to the International Labour Organization’s 
(‘ILO’) Call to Action “COVID-19: Action in the Global Garment Industry” in 
June 2020. This call to action commits the signatories to take action to 
protect garment workers’ income, health and employment during the 
COVID-19 crisis, and to work together to establish sustainable systems of 
social protection for a more just and resilient garment industry. 
We have engaged in the work of this Call to Action throughout the year and 
have participated in calls assessing risk across all of our sourcing territories, 
taking further action when needed to ensure our suppliers are protecting 
their workers accordingly against the ETI guidance. 
 
SUSTAINABLE SOURCING
Sustainable sourcing is an integral part of our Responsibly Joules 
commitments. In order to reduce the environmental impact of our sourcing 
we work with our suppliers to create quality products made from more 
sustainable raw materials, improve efficiency and reduce our use of 
resources including fresh water and energy. 
SUSTAINABLE MATERIALS
We recognise that the raw materials that go into our products have the 
biggest contribution to our overall impact, therefore we are working hard to 
produce all our products using more sustainable materials. In FY21 around 
50% of Joules’ products contained one or more sustainable materials, and 
we’ve set ourselves some ambitious targets to reach 100% of our key raw 
materials to be from more sustainable sources by the end of 2022.
In FY21 we sourced 46% of our key raw materials from more sustainable 
sources, +169% vs FY20. 
RAW MATERIAL TARGET
FY21 %
FY20 %
100% of cotton sourced as more 
sustainable cotton by end of 2022
78%
40%
100% of leather footwear and 
accessories sourced from LWG certified 
tanneries by end of 2020
78%
71%
100% of polyester materials to contain 
recycled content by end of 2022
13%
0.3%
100% of polyamide materials to contain 
recycled content by end of 2022
10%
0%
100% of man-made cellulosic fibres 
to be from sustainable sources by end 
of 2022
4%
2.5%
100% of wool to be from sustainable 
sources by end of 2022
0%
0%
100% of key raw materials to be from 
sustainable sources by end of 2022
46%
17%
We made great progress in FY21 to increase our mix of sustainable 
materials and start to introduce more sustainable materials and products. 
Key highlights include: 
•	 78% of all the leather used in our footwear and accessories sourced from 
Leather Working Group (‘LWG’) certified tanneries; 
•	 the introduction of LENZING™ EcoVero™ viscose into our womenswear 
range; 
•	 the significant increase in use of recycled polyester, which was 
introduced across our outerwear, knitwear and accessories ranges as 
well as continued use in our swimwear range; 
•	 the introduction of FSC rubber in our sustainable ‘Coast’ pumps. 
Sustainable materials focus areas of FY22 include continuing to increase our 
use of recycled polyester and polyamide, introducing certified responsible 
wool and increasing our mix of organic cotton. 
TEXTILE EXCHANGE’S CORPORATE FIBER & MATERIALS 
BENCHMARK PROGRAM
In order to support the work we are doing to move to sustainable materials in 
October 2020 we completed the Textile Exchange’s Corporate Fiber & 
Materials Benchmark program. This enables us to measure the impact of the 
materials we source and ensure that we are prioritising the correct materials 
using their preferred fibres framework. 
By completing this Joules was included in the 2020 Material Change Index 
(‘MCI’) launched in May 2021 and we are really proud to have achieved 
‘Level 3 – Maturing’ status, recognising Joules as a company with emerging 
leadership in sustainable materials sourcing. We are proud to have taken 
part in this programme and will now use this to support our continued work to 
achieve our targets. 
SUPPLY CHAIN TRANSPARENCY 
With everything that has happened in the last year Joules has also 
recognised a need to improve the transparency of our supply chain beyond 
our tier 1 suppliers, to ensure that the principles of our Responsibly Joules 
Policies are upheld throughout the supply chain. We have therefore initiated 
a pilot with supply chain transparency tool TrusTrace to support this. The tool 
will provide a platform for us to engage with our suppliers, track factory 
environmental and audit information, launch product level traceability 
requests and manage materials certifications. In FY22 we aim to roll this out 
to all tier 1 suppliers and map all of our tier 2 supply base. 
RESPONSIBLY JOULES

40
CARBON INTENSITY
The Group’s commitment to reduce the impact that our operations have on 
the climate has taken a step forward during the year by embedding our 
commitment to fighting for the environment as a key initiative in the Joules 
Blueprint ‘One plan’. 
As part of our ESG-linked financing with Barclays we have committed to 
reducing our Scope 1 and Scope 2 carbon intensity by 25% over the next 
3 years, from a FY20 baseline. 
STREAMLINED ENERGY AND CARBON REPORTING
The Group reports on all the greenhouse gas (‘GHG’) emission sources as 
required under the Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (‘SECR’) 
legislation.
The methodology used to calculate our emissions is the GHG Protocol Corporate 
Accounting and Reporting Standard (revised edition), based on the operational 
control approach i.e. where the Group operates the facility or asset. Data has 
been calculated using BEIS 2020 emission factors for all carbon streams. All 
emission and energy usage reported is UK based which complies with the 
requirements for large unquoted companies.
UK GHG EMISSIONS DATA
FY21
FY20
Scope 1 (tonnes CO₂e)²
Combustion of fuel and operation of 
facilities, refrigeration
187
 200
Scope 2 (tonnes CO₂e)³
Electricity, heat, steam and cooling 
purchased for own use
987
 1,061
Total Scope 1 and Scope 2 emissions
1,174
 1,261
Intensity metric 
(tonnes of CO₂e per £m of sales)
5.9
 8.6
1.	
Figures represent a 12-month period ending at or around the financial year end. The amounts 
above have been prepared on a pro-forma basis to reflect closure of stores during the Period, 
to allow comparison year on year.
2.	
Scope 1: Emissions associated with our direct activities, such as heating our stores, offices, 
warehouses, and company cars.
3.	
Scope 2: Emissions from the electricity we purchase.
RESPONSIBLY JOULES CONTINUED
PILLAR 2: FIGHTING FOR 
THE ENVIRONMENT
A love of the countryside is, and always will be, at the heart of the Joules 
brand. We create quality products built-to-last, perfect for enjoying the 
great outdoors (or the great indoors). Respecting and considering the 
environment that we constantly draw inspiration from is fundamental to our 
business.
Fighting for the environment is about identifying environmental impacts 
across our business, including our stores and offices, carbon emissions, 
packaging and waste, and taking action to minimise any negative impact 
and work toward having a positive impact for the future.
2
ACHIEVEMENTS THIS YEAR INCLUDE:
•	 In April 2021 we established a new ESG-linked financing facility with Barclays 
Bank PLC (‘Barclays’), linking our financing agreement to our performance 
against three Sustainability Performance Targets (SPTs) aligned with our 
Responsibly Joules work. 
•	 In the last year we have internally launched our new Joules Blueprint, with 
‘fighting for the environment’ embedded in everything we do. This includes a host 
of Responsibly Joules projects and the launch of a new ‘Fighting for the 
Environment’ action group made up of colleagues from across the business. 
•	 We have continued to make great progress in moving to sustainable packaging, 
in the last year we launched new FSC certified and recyclable welly boxes and 
100% recycled and recyclable garment polybags. 
FOCUS AREAS FOR THE YEAR AHEAD:
•	 Continue work to achieve fully sustainable packaging by implementing closed 
loop plastic recycling with our partner Duo, recycling garment polybag waste 
into new e-commerce mail bags. 
•	 Establish strategy and roadmap the delivery of our ‘fighting for the environment’ 
targets and projects, with performance measured quarterly and downloaded to 
the operating board. 
•	 Roll out of Responsibly Joules Policies and objectives internally to increase 
colleague engagement and empower all areas of the business to reduce their 
social and environmental impact. 
RESPONSIBLY JOULES

41
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
During the year, our reported UK GHG emissions were impacted by 
the following:
•	 COVID-19 – with our stores closed for more than half of their potential 
trading hours and most colleagues working from home, our direct 
business operations were reduced resulting in a reduction in our GHG 
emissions across this period
•	 An increased focus on incremental changes made across the 
organisation to reduce energy consumption whilst there has been limited 
use of some buildings, with a view to also set us up for long-term success 
towards energy reduction targets i.e. installation of LED lighting, 
thermostats and timers.
As mentioned above, as part of our ESG-linked financing with Barclays, we 
have set targets and we are working to minimise our carbon impact for 
Scopes 1 and 2. However we also know that we have a responsibility to 
measure our Scope 3 indirect carbon impact and work with our suppliers to 
reduce the emissions from our supply chain. Work has started on this next 
stage and is a priority focus for our CSR team over the coming year. 
We are committed to reducing Scope 3 carbon emissions from freight and 
logistics and work has already started on this. We are aiming to do this by 
continuing to drive greater freight efficiency through consolidation, simplified 
DC operations and moving away from airfreight shipments. In the last 12 
months we have reduced our carbon intensity by 10% vs FY20 and –32% vs. 
FY19. Our focus for FY22 is to continue working with our freight partners on 
their sustainability initiatives, in particular reducing miles travelled by 
streamlining ports at specific origins and creating more efficient return to 
stock processes.
WASTE
As part of our commitment to ‘fight for the environment’ we have set targets 
for the management of our waste across our head office, stores and 
warehouses. We are working hard to reduce the amount of waste generated 
and also within that the amount recycled. 
•	 During the year, UK store operations have resulted in 56.8 tonnes of 
waste being collected, with 99.72% of that waste being diverted from 
landfill and 51.40% being recycled. These metrics are reflective of the 
fact that stores were closed for significant periods during the period. 
•	 Our target is to reduce overall waste by 10-15% over the next three years 
from a normalised FY20 baseline 
•	 The amount of waste that is recycled (via traceable and ethical recycling 
routes) is also a key target for the Group going forward. Our target is to 
increase the amount of waste recycled to 70% over the next three years 
from a normalised FY20 baseline 
•	 The scope of waste to be measured will include all offices, showrooms, 
stores and distribution warehouses (including third-party operated).
PACKAGING AND PLASTICS
Packaging and plastics are another key area of focus for delivering on our 
‘fighting for the environment’ commitments. We have therefore been working 
hard to minimise the total amount of packaging used by Joules and to move 
to sustainable materials in our packaging. We have set the following targets 
to help achieve this: 
•	 100% of Joules licensed products paper and card packaging to be FSC 
or recycled and recyclable in line with Joules own brand product 
packaging by end of 2022
•	 100% of plastic used in Joules own brand product and supply chain 
packaging to contain at least 30% recycled content by end of 2022 
•	 100% of LDPE garment polybag waste from our warehouse and store 
operations to be recycled back into new Joules packaging by end of 2022
We have made great progress against these targets in FY21. From Autumn/
Winter 20 we introduced 100% recycled and recyclable LDPE garment 
polybags for all Joules own brand products. We have also initiated a trial of 
a new click and collect bag which is made from 50% GreenPE and 50% 
recycled LDPE, with the goal for the waste used in these bags to be collected 
and recycled from our own facilities, creating a closed loop system. 
We also continued to use our ‘Hello Sugar’ GreenPE mailbags for our 
online orders.
NEW JOULES HEAD OFFICE 
In June 2021 we opened our new Joules head office ‘The Joules Barn’ for 
use by our colleagues with the official opening to come later this year in line 
with government guidance. We worked hard to deliver a high quality, 
efficient building that has less impact on the environment. The design 
concept included the use of much of the existing building, upgraded to meet 
current standards and ensuring use of existing space, saving on the sourcing 
of energy intensive construction materials and processes. The new building 
was engineered to reduce the environmental impact of construction. It is built 
to the latest thermal efficiency standards reducing the carbon footprint and 
the building envelope has been designed with fixed windows which ensures 
the heating and cooling system is operating to maximum efficiency and 
lower energy use. Lighting is LED with controls in place to ensure efficient 
use. Building energy use is reduced further with the installation of roof 
mounted solar PVs producing electricity which is fed back into the buildings 
electrical circuit. Energy monitoring is provided through the Building 
Management System so complete control can be managed by the user. 
Externally the site has provision for the installation of electric car charging for 
use by the building’s users, and care has been taken to support the local 
environment and nature, with green space, tree planting and a bug hotel.
RESPONSIBLY JOULES

42
Through our Charitably Joules work, we are proud to have long-term 
partnerships with the following five charities: 
 
•	 The Woodland Trust 
•	 The Prince’s Trust 
•	 Hospice UK 
•	 Farms for City Children 
•	 Nuzzlets
COVID-19 has had a huge impact on the way we’re able to fundraise for 
our charity partners, but this hasn’t stopped us. We’ve adapted our 
approach and implemented new ways to ensure we’re still able to raise 
funds to support vital work and raise awareness of the causes that matter 
most to us. 
PILLAR 3: CHARITABLY 
JOULES
Our Joules stores sit at the heart of many communities and as such, we 
believe that we have an important role to play in supporting them. Through 
our Charitably Joules programme, we support charities which play crucial 
roles in the lives of children, young adults and families across the country, as 
well as charities that share our purpose of fighting for the environment. 
3
ACHIEVEMENTS THIS YEAR INCLUDE:
•	 We’ve raised a total of £285,000 for our charities throughout the year 
•	 Continued support with our customers and communities in the fight against 
COVID-19, raising vital funds for NHS Charities Together Urgent COVID-19 
Appeal through face covering sales. Our total donation since April 2020 now 
stands at over £160,000 
•	 In September 2020 we introduced online donations with Adyen Giving to our 
Joules.com checkout – offering online shoppers a chance to add a one-click 
donation to our charity partners. Since launch this has raised over £35,000 
•	 We placed our purpose at the heart of our Christmas campaign, celebrating the 
season of giving with The Woodland Trust by launching our ‘Woodland Tale’ 
digital advert and our Woodland Edit. For every piece sold from the edit we 
planted a tree. For Black Friday we continued our campaign, planting a tree 
for every order placed on the day. 
•	 Record fundraising for Joules in The Prince’s Trust Future Steps challenge – despite 
stores being closed and head office working remotely resulting in fewer teams 
signing up, we raised over £10,000 in the month, more than any other year for 
the challenge! 
FOCUS AREAS FOR THE YEAR AHEAD: 
•	 Throughout this coming year we will continue to champion the causes that matter 
to our customers and focus on delivering on our brand purpose of ‘brightening 
lives with the joy of the countryside and fighting for the environment that 
inspires us’.
•	 Plant over 80,000 trees through our partnership with the Woodland Trust, to 
reach our target of 250,000 trees by the end of 2022 
•	 In 2022 we’re spreading our wings in support of the RSPB. We have lovingly 
designed a collection across our women’s and children’s ranges that reflects 
some of the UK’s winged residents that the RSPB fight for every day. On an even 
chirpier note, with every purchase made from this collection we’ll be making 
a donation to help give nature a better home. 
•	 We will work to spotlight another fantastic charity this Christmas, watch this 
space! 
•	 Following the success of our online donations initiative we’ll be looking to 
introduce this to JoulesUSA.com
RESPONSIBLY JOULES

43
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
CHRISTMAS WITH 
THE WOODLAND TRUST
Last year we launched our commitment to plant 250,000 trees by the 
end of 2022 with the Woodland Trust, supporting their vital woodland 
creation and conservation efforts. 
Whilst our tree planting success continues, this year we wanted to bring 
the importance of protecting our woodlands to life for our customers, 
so we placed the Woodland Trust at the heart of our biggest campaign 
of the year, Christmas. 
Together we celebrated the season of giving by launching our 
‘Woodland Tale’ digital advert, highlighting the endangered species 
that rely on our woodlands and the need to protect them. Alongside 
this we launched our ‘Woodland Edit’, for every piece sold from the 
edit we planted a tree. We also balanced commerciality with 
conscience on Black Friday, planting a tree for every order placed on 
the day. 
We’re delighted with the response we received from our customers and 
colleagues – our purpose was truly placed at the heart of our 
Christmas activity and it showed. 
THE PRINCE’S TRUST 
AND FUTURE STEPS 
For the fourth year we enthusiastically took part in The Prince’s Trust 
Future Steps Challenge – encouraging Joules colleagues to team up 
and get moving throughout February, taking at least 10,000 steps a 
day and fundraising for a fantastic cause alongside. All of the Trust’s 
partners are encouraged to take part, creating a little friendly rivalry 
to see who comes out on top!
With the backdrop of a global pandemic and closed stores we knew 
the challenge would be a little tougher for people this year but we’re 
thrilled to say our teams delivered incredibly. With fewer teams than 
previous years we hit our highest fundraising total yet! Here are a few 
highlights…
•	 A record fundraising year from teams, raising over £10,000
•	 Joules came in 6th place on the overall fundraising leaderboard 
of over 50 corporate partners
•	 Our highest stepping team was ‘The Steppers Remix’ with 
2,765,345 steps taken collectively
•	 Our highest fundraising team was ‘The Merch Sole Sisters’ raising 
£1,093.75
RESPONSIBLY JOULES

44
ACHIEVEMENTS THIS YEAR INCLUDE:
BLUEPRINT
•	 This has and continues to be a collaborative process driven by feedback 
from our colleagues.
•	 As part of our ‘One Strong Team’ initiative to have clear roles and 
responsibilities, we conducted an organisation redesign to create a 
structure which is fit for purpose and can be scaled up for future growth.
COMMUNICATION
•	 We successfully launched our Colleague Forum to provide an avenue for 
Colleagues to share their views via elected members and support with 
the strengthening of our communication across Joules.
•	 We launched the Diversity and Inclusion Action Group to not only voice 
ideas on how Joules can become a more diverse and inclusive employer, 
but also hold us accountable for our actions.
WELLBEING
•	 We found that colleagues wanted more support with wellbeing. As a 
result of this, we have introduced a bigger and better employee 
assistance programme, managed by an external provider (BHSF) for all 
colleagues to access as well as providing additional wellbeing and 
support information on our internal learning platform, Fuse.
•	 We also introduced Mental Health First Aiders across all areas of the 
business.
•	 Throughout periods of lockdown we held multiple series of sessions to 
support our furloughed colleagues, one of which was our ‘Retail Welly 
Camp’, a range of sessions to help keep colleagues updated on business 
activity, learn some new skills, get ready for when stores reopened and 
of course to have a bit of fun whilst doing so.
PILLAR 4: OUR JOULES 
FAMILY
We have continued our focus on supporting all our colleagues through what 
has been a particularly demanding year. Our colleagues have adapted well 
to remote working and whilst this has at times proved challenging, there have 
been some significant achievements. It has enabled us to move forward in 
terms of new and more flexible ways of working, we have seen real 
efficiency gains in terms of more structured and effective meetings alongside 
allowing colleagues to have increased focused uninterrupted time to 
complete more complex tasks. Working flexibly across teams has really 
enabled colleagues’ individual needs to be met in an informal way.
We have been engaging with our colleagues on a more frequent basis and 
have taken regular feedback to help drive action across the business.
4
HIGHLIGHTS
•	 We introduced our ‘Joules Blueprint’ to create clarity about the direction of 
the business and the part that each individual has to play in that.
•	 We introduced bi-weekly updates directly from our CEO Nick, because our 
colleagues told us they wanted consistent, honest and open communication, 
displaying real transparency around how and what the business is doing.
•	 As part of our new ways of working, core hours were introduced between the 
hours of 10-4 to allow colleagues flexibility to plan their day accordingly and 
not be overloaded with meetings. 
•	 We launched our Diversity and Inclusion Action Group and set out our ‘Inclusively 
Joules’ charter (see pages 46–47 of this Report)
FOCUS AREAS FOR THE YEAR AHEAD:
•	 Build on the launch of our Blueprint to ensure we maintain momentum to enable 
the achievement of our strategic objectives.
•	 Ensure a smooth transition into our new head office building whilst maintaining our 
‘remote first’ approach with individual flexibility in ways of working which 
has proved popular with our colleagues over the last year.
•	 Continue our focus on maximising the use of technology both to support remote 
working and communication but also to introduce automation to streamline 
processes.
•	 Enhance candidate experience and increase inclusivity by broadening our 
approach to recruitment, updating our careers website, replacing our current ATS 
and building on the progress we have made to improve our colleague journey.
•	 Accelerate our early careers offering by use of the government Kickstart 
programme in addition to exploring apprenticeships and graduate opportunities.
RESPONSIBLY JOULES

45
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
TRAINING
•	 From our engagement survey colleagues expressed their views around 
lack of training in certain areas. Since then, we have continued to 
increase our L&D offering and have utilised our learning and 
development platform, Fuse, to provide additional training material that 
can be accessible at any time. 
•	 More ‘lunch ‘n learns’ have been hosted to not only gain valuable on the 
job skills, but also raise awareness on other important topics. 
•	 We have accelerated our Apprenticeship learning programme, which is 
continuing to prove popular, with our colleagues achieving fantastic 
results. 
RESPONSIBLY JOULES

46
INCLUSIVELY JOULES
OUR INCLUSIVELY JOULES CHARTER
Here at Joules, family and community are at the heart of everything we do. 
As we move towards building a better, more inclusive future for our people 
and our customers, we have set out a charter of commitments that outline the 
actions we will take to become a company that makes all people we 
communicate with feel included, respected and heard.
We have set out five key streams that outline these commitments to make sure 
our inclusion goals are met. These will be upheld by our Inclusively Joules 
Action Group, which is made up of colleagues, customers and advisers who 
will hold us to account and ensure that we’re creating sustainable, 
meaningful change every step of the way.
We know that this is just the beginning of our journey, but we’re confident 
that if we join together, we can make Joules a more inclusive brand for 
everybody.

47
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
INCLUSIVELY JOULES
REPRESENTATION
We will seek out a broader and more inclusive 
representation of the Joules brand to be reflective 
of the society we live in today, from our 
colleagues and our models to the locations we 
use in our images. We will also endeavour to 
foster a more diverse mix of partnerships within 
our Friends of Joules initiative. It will be an 
expectation for all our partners and suppliers to 
uphold the principles that underpin inclusion, 
both in the workplace and in the community.
INDUSTRY CHANGE
We aspire to become a leading voice for change 
within the retail industry, especially within our 
home of the Midlands. We aim to work 
collaboratively with other retailers to address the 
barriers we are aware of and to understand the 
challenges we haven’t yet uncovered.
CONVERSATION
We will encourage inclusion and diversity to be a 
continuous, living, breathing topic for our 
colleagues and communities. This will be made 
possible by providing platforms for people to 
share their stories and experiences. Our 
Inclusively Joules Action Group will oversee 
ensuring this momentum is constant.
ACCESS AND OPPORTUNITY
We will continue to strive to create more 
opportunities for people from all walks of life to 
benefit from the joy of the countryside. This will 
involve looking to broaden our current offering to 
be more inclusive and encourage more people to 
connect with our brand.
EDUCATION
We will support our colleagues to understand the 
importance of inclusion and what this means to us 
here at Joules, as well as providing a platform to 
learn about the history of the many cultures in our 
community. Diversity and inclusion principles will 
become central to our onboarding process as 
well as to our learning and leadership 
programmes.

48
SECTION 172 STATEMENT
INTRODUCTION 
The Board is mindful of all stakeholders when making decisions of strategic importance.
Stakeholder engagement is central to the formulation and execution of our strategy and is critical in achieving long-term sustainable success. The needs of our 
different stakeholders as well as the consequences of any decision in the long term are well-considered by the Board. It is not always possible to provide 
positive outcomes for all stakeholders and the Board sometimes has to make decisions based on the competing priorities of stakeholders. Our stakeholder 
engagement processes enable our Board to understand what matters to stakeholders and carefully consider all the relevant factors and select the course of 
action that best leads to the high standards of business conduct and success of Joules in the long term. 
KEY STAKEHOLDERS
The Board considers its key stakeholders to be its employees, customers, suppliers, the communities in which it operates, the environment, governments and 
industry bodies and its shareholders.
S172(1) STATEMENT:
In accordance with section 172(1) of the Companies Act 2006, a Director of a company must act in the way he or she considers, in good faith, would 
be most likely to promote the success of the company for the benefit of its members as a whole, and in doing so have regard, amongst other matters, to: 
(a) the likely consequences of any decision in the long term 
(b) the interests of the company’s employees 
(c) the need to foster the company’s business relationships with customers
(d) the impact of the company’s operations on the community and the environment 
(e) the desirability of the company maintaining a reputation for high standards of business conduct 
(f) the need to act fairly between members of the company.
The following disclosure describes how the Directors of the Group have taken account of the matters set out in section 172(1) (a) to (f) and forms the 
Directors’ statement required under section 172 of the Companies Act 2006.
HOW THE GROUP ENGAGES WITH ITS KEY STAKEHOLDERS:
STAKEHOLDER
ENGAGEMENT EXAMPLES AND FURTHER REFERENCES 
WITHIN THIS ANNUAL REPORT 
EMPLOYEES
•	 Comprehensive digital onboarding and induction plans for new joiners
•	 Company-wide digital learning and development platform for learning, sharing, career 
development and collaboration
•	 Annual Company-wide and independently analysed employee engagement survey
•	 Regular Company-wide colleague updates (currently twice a month)
•	 Annual retail store manager conference to enhance communication and share best practice
•	 A colleague forum has been established in the Period to cover areas including inclusivity, 
feedback and improvement suggestions.
See also: Our Joules Family within the Responsibly Joules section of this annual report.
CUSTOMERS
•	 Regular customer feedback forums and focus groups are conducted to provide customer 
insight
•	 Product feedback requests for online purchases 
•	 Interaction with customers in stores on a daily basis and through targeted in-store customer 
engagement events
•	 Relevant targeted marketing campaigns, engaging social media content and a Joules customer 
facing blog
•	 Customer service support function assists with all customer queries with follow-up on customer 
satisfaction on the resolution of their query.
See also: CEO’s report section of this annual report.
SECTION 172 STATEMENT

49
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
STAKEHOLDER
ENGAGEMENT EXAMPLES AND FURTHER REFERENCES 
WITHIN THIS ANNUAL REPORT 
SHAREHOLDERS
•	 Individual meetings with institutional shareholders throughout the year and particularly 
following interim and full year results
•	 Shareholders are invited to submit questions to the Board at the Group’s Annual General 
Meeting 
•	 Investor information and Company financial reports and updates published via the Group’s 
corporate website
•	 With Tom Joule as a founder shareholder committed to the future of the business, we maintain 
a relationship with all of our shareholders to allow us to take a long-term view in the 
management of the business. This involvement is central to ensuring we act fairly in considering 
the needs of all shareholders, along with other stakeholders.
See also: Governance Framework section of this Report.
COMMUNITIES AND ENVIRONMENT 
•	 Charitably Joules programme in place supporting the local communities where our stores are 
based and the surrounding environment
•	  The following charitable partnerships are in place: 
–	 The Prince’s Trust
–	 Hospice UK
–	 Farms for City Children
–	 Nuzzlets 
–	 The Woodland Trust
•	 Various environmental initiatives including beach cleans, tree planting projects, green 
packaging alternatives and sustainable product sourcing.
•	 Continued support for the fight against COVID-19 by building on the previously curated Joules 
“Rainbow Edit” of products which included a selection of rainbow themed products, the profits 
from sales of which were donated to NHS COVID-19 support charities, by raising further funds 
through the sale of face coverings, with a total of over £160,000 raised to date.
See also: Responsibly Joules section of this Report.
PARTNERS & SUPPLIERS
•	 Comprehensive assessment and onboarding process for all new Joules product suppliers 
•	 Ongoing supplier training programme including more challenging compliance areas, 
delivered by our third-party supplier audit partner
•	 Annual supplier conference, held virtually on the last two occasions, to provide suppliers with 
an update on the Group’s strategy and future plans
•	 Annual independent compliance audits for product suppliers using the SMETA or BSCI audit 
process
•	 Regular account management meetings are held with senior representatives from our larger 
non-product suppliers
•	 Periodic supplier surveys covering topical matters, for example Brexit readiness, 
COVID-19 impacts 
See also: Sustainable Sourcing section within the Responsibly Joules section of this Report
SECTION 172 STATEMENT

50
STAKEHOLDER
ENGAGEMENT EXAMPLES AND FURTHER REFERENCES 
WITHIN THIS ANNUAL REPORT 
GOVERNMENTS 
(AND TAX AUTHORITIES) 
AND INDUSTRY BODIES
•	 The Group has processes in place to monitor new regulations and compliance requirements 
that may impact the business – including for example product regulations, financial accounting 
and reporting updates and tax accounting and reporting compliance
•	 Group management engage regularly with industry bodies including the British Retail 
Consortium, The Retail Trust, the Better Cotton Initiative and the Ethical Trade Initiative
See also: Principal Risks & Uncertainties section of this Report.
KEY BOARD DECISIONS IN FY21:
BOARD DECISION
CONSIDERATIONS
The Board reviewed the Group’s financing facilities in 
light of the business’ current and future operations, 
successful management through the COVID-19 pandemic 
to date and the Group’s current and forecast cash flow 
requirements and agreed:
1)	 not to seek to extend the temporary £15 million 12 
month increase in the revolving credit facility (RCF) with 
Barclays Bank PLC that was secured in the prior period, 
resulting in an overall reduction of the Group’s RCF from 
£40 million to £25 million.
2)	 to extend the term of the remaining £25m RCF out to 
September 2024 in line with the Board’s long term 
planning and to transfer the arrangement to an ESG 
linked facility which is aligned to the Group’s Responsibly 
Joules targets.
The Board considered the funding requirements to support the Group’s strategic objectives.
Consideration was given to the Group’s short, medium and long-term growth plans to deliver 
shareholder value maximisation, whilst also maintaining a strong relationship with the Group’s 
bank, Barclays Bank PLC.
In addition, the Directors were mindful of the Responsibly Joules ambitions of the Group and 
therefore linked an element of the interest rate payable on the extended facility to ESG targets, to 
demonstrate the Group’s commitment to all internal and external stakeholders in this area. 
The Board took the decision to continue to postpone any 
dividends during the Period in light of the on-going 
impact of COVID-19 on the Group’s operations 
The requirement to preserve short term cash flow in light of the impact of COVID-19 on the 
Group’s operations and therefore ensure long term viability of the business and long-term 
shareholder value.
SECTION 172 STATEMENT CONTINUED
SECTION 172 STATEMENT

51
	 Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
BOARD DECISION
CONSIDERATIONS
The Board continued to review the response of the 
business to the impact of COVID-19 on key stakeholders 
and approved the following actions:
•	 Colleague welfare: closure of stores and offices in 
line with the UK Government’s lockdowns, top-up of 
the Government’s 80% furlough pay to 90% for the 
duration of furlough status, comprehensive support for 
colleagues whilst working remotely from home 
including financial support, enhanced and extended 
flexible working arrangements for all colleagues, 
access to IT equipment and work station set-up 
advice and tools and support to assist with mental 
health challenges
•	 Customers: increased engagement via website and 
social media platforms, extended product returns 
policy up to 365 days and maintained comprehensive 
risk assessments and social distancing operations in 
stores when open
•	 Suppliers/Partners: collaborative and fair 
rescheduling of stock purchases and payment terms.
•	 The continued agreement of fair and appropriate 
settlements with store landlords. 
The requirement to prioritise the welfare and health & safety of all colleagues and customers, 
whilst taking in to account the impact of lockdown on childcare arrangements, work/life balance 
and mental health.
The requirement to support suppliers and partners, in particular small and local businesses, 
through lockdown and the financial impact on trading, whilst taking in to account the need to have 
strong and stable suppliers to support the long-term viability of the business.
The Board reviewed the results of the recent employee 
engagement pulse survey and agreed a number of 
initiatives to be carried out by the senior leadership team.
Consideration of the feedback provided by employees who completed the survey. Taking 
appropriate action is critical for employees to engage in the process and for positive changes to 
be implemented.
The Board confirmed the appointment of a new 
Chief Financial Officer.
The need to recruit an appropriately experienced and talented individual who was the right fit for 
the culture of the business and understood the values of the Joules Brand, as well as the strategic 
growth aspirations of the Board and the requirements of shareholders and the market. The need to 
also consider long-term succession planning in terms of future Board development.
This statement was reviewed and approved by the Board on 2 August 2021.
SECTION 172 STATEMENT


Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
2
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
READY, SET… GO!
When designing a garment, we constantly think about 
our customers – where will the item be worn, when and 
with what? After shapes and colours, we will consider 
what functional features and details will add practicality 
whilst not compromising the style.

54
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
IAN FILBY
NON-EXECUTIVE CHAIRMAN
Ian joined Joules in 2018 following almost eight 
years as Chief Executive Officer at DFS Furniture 
plc. He is on the board of the British Retail 
Consortium (‘BRC’) and Chairman of the BRC 
Policy Board. He is also a Trustee of Pennies 
charity, Chairman of Her Spirit and Director of IFF 
Life and Business Solutions Ltd. Ian has more than 
40 years of retail experience, largely at Alliance 
Boots, where his last two roles were Retail Brand 
Development Director and Trading Director. He 
has also held the roles of Chairman of Sofology, 
Interim Chief Executive Officer of Nectar and 
Non-Executive Chairman of Shoe Zone plc.
CAROLINE YORK
CHIEF 
FINANCIAL OFFICER
Caroline joined Joules on 26 July 2021 and was 
appointed Chief Financial Officer shortly 
thereafter. She joins from Moneysupermarket 
Group Plc, the FTSE250 price comparison 
business, where she held the position of 
Finance Director. 
Caroline is a chartered accountant and has over 
16 years’ experience in finance leadership 
positions at Heathrow and BAA and, before that, 
held roles at Atos KPMG and PwC.
DAVID STEAD
SENIOR INDEPENDENT 
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
David joined the Board in April 2016 and chairs 
the Audit Committee. David is currently 
Independent Non-Executive Director at Card 
Factory plc and Senior Independent Non-
Executive Director at Naked Wines plc. At both 
companies he is also Chair of the Audit 
Committee and a member of the Nomination and 
Remuneration Committees. He has many years’ 
experience as a director of companies in the UK 
retail sector. David was the CFO of Dunelm 
Group plc for 12 years from 2003 to 2015. Prior 
to this, David served as Finance Director for Boots 
The Chemists and Boots Healthcare International 
between 1991 and 2003. David is a chartered 
accountant, having spent the early part of his 
career with KPMG. 
JILL LITTLE
INDEPENDENT 
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
Jill joined the Board in April 2016 and chairs the 
Remuneration Committee. Jill was previously the 
Senior Independent Non-Executive Director of 
Shaftesbury plc and chaired their Remuneration 
Committee. Jill was Chairman of the National 
Trust Commercial Advisory Group and was on the 
board of Nobia AB, as a Non-Executive Director. 
Jill has spent the majority of her career in the retail 
industry, firstly at Simpsons of Piccadilly and then 
at the John Lewis Partnership (1975 to 2012). Jill 
became Merchandise Director on the board of 
John Lewis, moving roles to become the Strategy 
and International Director where she was 
responsible for developing the long-term strategy 
and international expansion of John Lewis. 
Thereafter Jill became Business Development 
Director of the John Lewis Partnership. Jill is also a 
Non-Executive Director of Loungers Plc.
TOM JOULE
FOUNDER AND CHIEF BRAND OFFICER
Tom founded Joules in 1989 selling practical, 
high-quality garments at shows and events around 
the UK. Tom’s entrepreneurial spirit, and flair in 
giving products personality to match Joules’ 
customers’ colourful and uplifting outlook, has 
been central to the brand’s continued success and 
expansion. With Joules now a global lifestyle 
brand, in his current role, Tom is focused on 
connecting with the Joules customer and category 
product direction. Since 2010, Tom has featured 
regularly in Drapers 100 Most Influential People 
in Fashion Retail. In 2015 he was a finalist in the 
Fashion Entrepreneur of the Year category at the 
Great British Entrepreneur Awards.
NICK JONES
CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
Nick was appointed CEO of Joules in 2019. Prior 
to joining the business, he was SVP-Commercial 
at Asda and a member of the Executive Board, 
having previously held roles as Managing 
Director of George, and as Commercial Director. 
During his time at Asda, Nick was responsible for 
the performance of the grocer’s trading divisions 
across food, general merchandise and clothing, 
and helped drive significant innovation and digital 
transformation across the business.
Nick has over 25 years’ experience in developing 
retail brands and strategy, and also previously 
held a number of senior and director roles at 
leading British retailer Marks & Spencer.
Nick is an alumnus of Harvard University, having 
completed a Personal Leadership and 
Development course at Harvard Business School.

55
Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORK
GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORK
CHAIRMAN’S INTRODUCTION
I have pleasure in introducing the Joules Group plc Corporate Governance 
Statement. The Board is committed to supporting high standards of 
corporate governance and during the financial year ended 30 May 2021 
(‘FY21’) the Board continued to adopt the Quoted Companies Alliance 
Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’). In this section of the Annual 
Report, we set out our governance framework and describe the work we 
have done to ensure good corporate governance throughout Joules Group 
plc and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’).
The Board is committed to a strong ethical corporate culture and ensuring 
the culture within the business is consistent with Joules’ strategic objectives 
and business model. The Board achieves this by:
•	 Encouraging diversity, inclusion and equal opportunities for all 
employees, as outlined in the Responsibly Joules section of this Report
•	 Investment in training and development
•	 Regular updates from the Board’s Executive Directors and communication 
with employees e.g. weekly internal communications emails, bi-monthly 
Group-wide video updates and an annual conference for store 
managers and the wider business
•	 Appropriate induction for new employees
•	 Investment in the recently opened new head office, providing a vibrant 
and creative environment consistent with the Group’s values.
The Board monitors and assesses the culture in the business through an 
externally managed employee engagement survey which is carried out at 
least annually. The results of this survey are reviewed by the Board and 
senior management to identify areas of focus – either to maintain and 
improve on strengths or to develop actions and initiatives to address any 
areas of concern.
There have been changes in the Board during the year with Marc Dench 
resigning as Chief Financial Officer (‘CFO’) with effect from 11th May 2021 
and his replacement, Caroline York, joining on 26 July 2021.
During the period between Marc departing and Caroline joining the 
business, Jon Dargie the Group Financial Controller, acted as interim CFO. 
Marc Dench also remained available to the Group on a consultancy basis 
to provide support and advice.
In addition, as announced on 3 August, from September 2021 Tom Joule’s 
role will change to that of a Non-Executive Director. He will also remain 
available as a strategic adviser to the Chief Executive Officer regarding the 
development of Friends of Joules and the Garden Trading business.
IAN FILBY
Non-Executive Chairman
BOARD SIZE AND COMPOSITION
For FY21, up to the date of Marc Dench’s resignation on 11 May 2021, the 
Board comprised of six Directors: a Non-Executive Chairman, two further 
Non-Executive Directors and three Executive Directors. For the remainder of 
FY21 the Board comprised five Directors: a Non-Executive Chairman, two 
further Non-Executive Directors and two Executive Directors.
ROLE OF THE BOARD
The Board is collectively responsible for the long-term success of the Group. 
It provides entrepreneurial leadership, sets Group strategy, upholds the 
Group’s culture and values, reviews management performance and ensures 
that the Group’s obligations to shareholders are understood and met.
HOW THE BOARD OPERATES
The Executive Directors are responsible for business operations and for 
ensuring that the necessary financial and human resources are in place to 
carry out the Group’s strategic aims. The Non-Executive Directors’ role is to 
provide an independent view of the Group’s business and to constructively 
challenge management and help develop proposals on strategy. The Board 
as a whole reviews all strategic issues and key strategic decisions on a 
regular basis. Control over the performance of the Group is maintained 
through evaluation of financial information; the monitoring of performance 
against key budgetary targets; and by monitoring the return on strategic 
investments.
The Chairman takes responsibility for ensuring that the Directors receive 
accurate, timely and clear information.
Directors are aware of their right to have any concerns recorded in the 
Board minutes.
MATTERS RESERVED FOR THE BOARD
Certain matters are reserved for approval by the Board, these include:
•	 Strategy and business plans – including the annual budget
•	 Acquisitions and disposals of businesses (including minority interests)
•	 Changes in share capital and dividends
•	 Board and Committee membership and delegation of authority
•	 Remuneration and employment benefits for the Executive Directors
•	 Corporate statutory reporting
•	 Appointment of auditors
•	 New debt facilities
•	 Major capital and revenue commitments
•	 Corporate governance, policy approval, internal control and risk 
management
•	 Certain litigation matters in line with the Joules litigation reporting policy
•	 Corporate social responsibilities

56
GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORK
BOARD MEETINGS
The Board has met eleven times in the reporting period. For all Board 
meetings an agenda is established, and a Board pack is circulated at least 
48 hours ahead of the meeting. As a minimum, the items covered include:
•	 Financial performance review
•	 Management accounts and KPIs
•	 Update on governance, finance, legal and risk matters
•	 Updates on significant business initiatives
•	 Proposals on any major items of capital expenditure
•	 Health and safety
•	 Compliance with banking covenants and cash flow forecast
The Board receives reports from the Executive Directors to enable it to be 
informed of and supervise the matters within its remit. The Board considers at 
least annually the Group’s strategic plan and, on a regular rolling basis, the 
Board receives presentations from management on key areas of the Group’s 
operations.
The following table shows Directors’ attendance at scheduled Board and 
Committee meetings in the Period under review:
BOARD
AUDIT
REMUNERATION
NOMINATION
Ian Filby
11/11
3/3
4/4
2/2
Tom Joule
11/11
–
–
–
Nick Jones
11/11
–
–
–
Marc Dench
10/11
–
–
–
David Stead
11/11
3/3
4/4
2/2
Jill Little
11/11
3/3
4/4
2/2
BOARD DECISIONS AND ACTIVITY DURING THE YEAR
The Board has a schedule of regular business, financial and operational 
matters, and each Board Committee has compiled a schedule of work, to 
ensure that all areas for which the Board has responsibility are addressed 
and reviewed during the course of the year. The Chairman, aided by the 
Company Secretary, is responsible for ensuring that the Directors receive 
accurate and timely information to enable the Board to discharge its duties. 
The Company Secretary compiles the Board and Committee papers which 
are circulated to Directors at least 48 hours prior to meetings. The Company 
Secretary also ensures that any feedback or suggestions for improvement on 
Board papers are fed back to management. The Company Secretary 
provides minutes of each meeting and every Director is aware of the right to 
have any concerns minuted.
BOARD COMMITTEES
The Board has delegated specific responsibilities to the Audit, Remuneration 
and Nomination Committees. Each Committee has written terms of reference 
setting out its duties, authority and reporting responsibilities, with copies 
available on the Company’s website (www.joulesgroup.com) or upon 
request from the Company Secretary. The terms of reference of each 
Committee were put in place at the time of the Company’s admission to the 
Alternative Investment Market (‘AIM’) on 26 May 2016 and they are kept 
under review to ensure they remain appropriate and reflect any changes in 
legislation, regulation or best-practice. Each Committee comprises 
Non-Executive Directors of the Company. The Company Secretary is the 
secretary of the Audit and Nomination Committees and the Group General 
Counsel is secretary of the Remuneration Committee.
BOARD EFFECTIVENESS
The skills and experience of the Board are set out in their biographical 
details in the Board of Directors section of this Annual Report. The 
experience and knowledge of each of the Directors gives them the ability to 
constructively challenge strategy and to scrutinise performance.
SEPARATION OF DUTIES
There is a clear division of responsibilities between the Chairman and CEO. 
Ian Filby, the Chairman, leads the Board and is responsible for its 
effectiveness and governance. He sets the Board agenda and ensures that 
sufficient time is allocated to important matters, in particular strategic issues. 
Nick Jones, the CEO is responsible for the day-to-day management of 
Joules’ operations and the recommendation of strategy to the Board. Nick is 
then responsible for implementing that strategy supported by the wider 
management team.
The Non-Executive Directors have responsibility for determining the 
remuneration of Executive Directors and have the primary role in appointing 
and, where necessary, removing Executive Directors, and in succession 
planning.
INDUCTION OF NEW DIRECTORS
On joining the Board, new Directors undergo an induction programme 
which is tailored to the existing knowledge and experience of the Director 
concerned, including store and office visits; meetings with key employees; 
and presentations from management on topics such as strategy, finance and 
risk. The Chairman is responsible for this process supported by the Company 
Secretary.
TIME COMMITMENTS
The Board is satisfied that the Chairman and each of the Non-Executive and 
Executive Directors continue to be able to devote sufficient time to meet their 
Board responsibilities and carry out the Company’s business.
EVALUATION
The planned formal evaluation of the Board which was due to take place 
during the Period has been delayed until autumn 2021. It was considered 
appropriate to delay this evaluation to allow the Board to focus on 
supporting the Company through the challenges presented by COVID-19, 
and to allow time for Caroline York to settle into her new role as CFO.
The Chairman will continue to meet regularly with the Non-Executive 
Directors without the Executive Directors being present and the Senior 
Independent Non-Executive Director will also meet with his fellow 
Non-Executive Director, at least annually, and also on such other occasions 
as are deemed appropriate, to appraise the Chairman’s performance.
GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORK CONTINUED

57
Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORK
DEVELOPMENT
The Company Secretary ensures that all Directors are kept abreast of 
changes in relevant legislation and regulations, with the assistance of the 
Group’s advisers where appropriate. Executive Directors are subject to the 
Group’s performance development review process through which their 
performance against objectives is reviewed and their personal and 
professional development needs considered.
EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS
In the appropriate circumstances, the Board may authorise Executive 
Directors to take non-executive positions in other companies and 
organisations provided the time commitment does not conflict with the 
Director’s duties to the Company. The appointment to such positions is 
subject to Board approval.
CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
At each meeting, the Board considers Directors’ conflicts of interest. The 
Company’s Articles of Association provide for the Board to authorise any 
actual or potential conflicts of interest.
INDEPENDENT PROFESSIONAL ADVICE
Directors have access to independent professional advice at the Company’s 
expense. In addition, they have access to the advice and services of the 
Company Secretary who is responsible for advising the Board on corporate 
governance matters.
ELECTION OF DIRECTORS
In accordance with best practice, all Directors will offer themselves for 
election at each Annual General Meeting (‘AGM’).
RISK MANAGEMENT AND INTERNAL CONTROLS
The Board has ultimate responsibility for the Group’s system of internal 
control and for reviewing its effectiveness. However, any such system of 
internal control can provide only reasonable, but not absolute, assurance 
against material misstatement or loss. The Board considers that the internal 
controls in place are appropriate for the size, complexity and risk profile of 
the Group. The principal elements of the Group’s internal control system 
include:
•	 Day-to-day management of the activities of the Group by the Executive 
Directors
•	 Preparation of a detailed annual budget including an integrated profit 
and loss, balance sheet and cash flow. The budget is approved by the 
Board
•	 Monthly reporting of performance against the budget is prepared and 
reviewed by the Board
•	 A schedule of delegated authority is maintained which defines levels of 
approval authority over such items as capital expenditure, commercial 
contracts, litigation and treasury matters
•	 Maintenance of a risk register which is reviewed at least annually by the 
Board.
The Group continues to review its system of internal control to ensure 
compliance with best practice, whilst also having regard to its size and the 
resources available.
BOARD DIVERSITY
The Board does not have a formal Board diversity policy but plans to 
continue to review the need for such a policy annually, taking into account 
the size of the Board and skills required.
RELATIONS WITH SHAREHOLDERS
The Group maintains communication with institutional shareholders through 
individual meetings with Executive Directors, particularly following 
publication of the Group’s interim and full year preliminary results. In normal 
years, all shareholders are invited to attend the AGM at which the Group’s 
activities will be considered and questions answered. 
In 2020, due to the COVID-19 situation, the AGM was held as a closed 
meeting and shareholders were unable to attend the AGM as usual but were 
invited to submit questions to the Executive Directors in advance of the AGM. 
Answers to questions submitted were published on the Group’s website 
(www.joulesgroup.com) in advance of the AGM. 
Subject to any COVID-19 restrictions on indoor gatherings which may be in 
place at the time, we hope to be able to welcome shareholders to our 
2021 AGM.
The Senior Independent Director is available to shareholders if they have 
concerns, which contact through the normal channels of Chairman, Chief 
Executive or other Executive Directors fails to resolve, or for which such 
contact is inappropriate.
ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING
The Company’s AGM will take place on 5 October 2021. The Annual 
Report and Accounts and Notice of the AGM will be sent to shareholders 
at least 20 working days prior to this date.

58
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Audit Committee Report 
for the period ended 30 May 2021 (the ‘Period’).
The Audit Committee’s primary role is to ensure that the Group’s financial 
reporting and audit processes are effective and that its risk management 
systems and controls are effective. This includes:
•	 monitoring the financial integrity of the financial statements of the Group 
and the involvement of the Group’s external auditors in the external audit 
process
•	 providing oversight and advice to the Board in relation to current and 
potential future risk exposures of the Group
•	 reviewing and approving various formal reporting requirements and 
promoting a risk awareness culture within the Group
•	 providing advice to the Board as to whether the Annual Report and 
Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary for stakeholders to assess the 
Company’s position and performance, business model and strategy.
MEMBERS OF THE AUDIT COMMITTEE
The Committee consists of three Non-Executive Directors: David Stead 
(Chair), Ian Filby and Jill Little. The external auditor (Deloitte LLP), the Chief 
Executive Officer, Founder & Chief Brand Officer, and Chief Financial 
Officer also attend Committee meetings by invitation. The Committee has 
met four times since 5 August 2020, being the date the Group’s last Annual 
Report was approved.
The Board is satisfied that I, as Chairman of the Committee, have recent and 
relevant financial experience. I am a chartered accountant and I have 
served as Finance Director in a number of companies including Dunelm 
Group plc. I report formally to the Board, as appropriate, on issues 
discussed by the Audit Committee and I present the Committee’s 
recommendations.
The Committee also takes time to meet with the external auditors without any 
Executive Directors or senior management present.
DUTIES
The duties of the Audit Committee are set out in its terms of reference, which 
are available on the Company website (www.joulesgroup.com) and are 
also available on request from the Company Secretary.
The Committee meets a minimum of twice per year.
The main focus areas and items of business considered by the Audit 
Committee are:
•	 Review of the key areas of judgement and estimation which have been 
used by management in preparing the financial statements, in 
conjunction with input from the external auditors
•	 Consideration of the external audit report and the external auditor’s 
management letter which includes observations on the Group’s financial 
control environment
•	 Review of the risk management and internal control systems, and of the 
Company’s risk register
•	 Review of the need for an internal audit function
•	 Review of taxation matters of the Group
•	 Review any whistleblowing reports
•	 Review of the implications of forthcoming updates or changes to 
accounting standards
•	 Review the Consolidated Financial Statements and the Annual Report 
and assess whether, taken as a whole, the Report and Accounts are fair, 
balanced and understandable and provide the information necessary for 
stakeholders to assess the Company’s position and performance, 
business model and strategy.
In relation to the integrity of the financial statements for the year ended 
30 May 2021, the Committee also reviewed and considered the following 
specific areas: 
•	 The impact of COVID-19 on the business and the actions taken during 
the year, for example, claims made under the Government’s Coronavirus 
Job Retention Scheme
•	 The acquisition of The Garden Trading Company Limited in the Period 
including the valuation of the business, acquisition accounting and 
treatment of contingent consideration
•	 The approach to judgemental items such as asset impairments, returns 
provision and obsolete stock provisions
•	 The classification of exceptional items, including store and other asset 
impairments, and restructuring and acquisition costs
ROLE OF THE EXTERNAL AUDITOR
The Audit Committee monitors the Company’s relationship with the external 
auditor, Deloitte LLP, to ensure that external auditor independence and 
objectivity are maintained. As part of its review the Committee monitors the 
provision of non-audit services by the external auditor. The breakdown of 
fees between audit and non-audit services is provided in Note 7 of the 
Group’s Consolidated Financial Statements. The non-audit fees related to 
payroll services provided in the year with regards to the Group’s Irish 
activities. These services have now ceased. The Committee concluded in the 
Period that, unless approved in advance by the Audit Committee, the 
external auditors will not be permitted to perform any non-audit services for 
the Group during the year ending May 2022.
The Committee also assesses the external auditor’s performance. Having 
reviewed the external auditor’s independence and performance, the Audit 
Committee recommends that Deloitte LLP be re-appointed as the Company’s 
external auditor at the next AGM.
AUDIT PROCESS
The external auditor prepares an audit plan that sets out the scope of the 
audit, key areas of audit focus, audit materiality and the timetable for audit 
work. This plan is reviewed and agreed in advance by the Audit Committee. 
Following the completion of its work, the external auditor presents its findings 
to the Audit Committee for discussion.
INTERNAL AUDIT
At present the Group does not have an internal audit function. This will be 
kept under review as the business evolves.
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT
JOULES GROUP PLC

59
Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT
RISK MANAGEMENT AND INTERNAL CONTROLS
The Group has a framework of risk management and internal control 
systems, policies and procedures. The Audit Committee is responsible for 
reviewing the risk management and internal control framework and ensuring 
that it operates effectively. The Committee has reviewed the framework and 
is satisfied that risk management is appropriate for the size of business; the 
internal control framework continues to evolve and will be a key focus in the 
coming year. Specific areas assessed during the Period via the risk 
management framework include:
•	 Risks around potential data breaches, including IT and cyber security 
and data protection requirements
•	 Ethical sourcing arrangements
•	 Disruption to supply chain and distribution network
•	 Health and safety arrangements
•	 An external third-party review of Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme 
claims made during the Period.
WHISTLEBLOWING
The Group has a whistleblowing policy in place which sets out the formal 
process by which an employee of the Group may, in confidence, raise 
concerns about possible improprieties in financial reporting or other matters. 
Whistleblowing is a standing item on the Committee’s agenda, and updates 
are provided at each meeting as necessary, or a minimum of twice per year. 
During the Period, there were no incidents for consideration.
GOING CONCERN
The Directors have prepared detailed financial forecasts with a supporting 
business plan covering the medium-term future. These forecasts capture both 
the base plan and downside scenarios. Further detail on the going concern 
review is provided in the Directors’ Report section of this Annual Report. Both 
the base plan and downside scenario forecasts indicate that the Group will 
remain in compliance with covenants throughout the forecast period. As 
such, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company and 
the Group have adequate resources to continue in operational existence for 
the foreseeable future. For this reason, they continue to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing the financial statements.
DAVID STEAD
Audit Committee Chairman

60
NOMINATION COMMITTEE REPORT
On behalf of the Board I am pleased to present the Nomination Committee 
Report for the period ended 30 May 2021.
MEMBERS OF THE NOMINATION COMMITTEE
The Nomination Committee consists of three Non-Executive Directors; 
Ian Filby (Chair), David Stead and Jill Little. Executive Directors attend 
by invitation.
DUTIES
In carrying out its duties, the Nomination Committee is primarily responsible 
for:
•	 Identifying and nominating candidates to fill Board vacancies
•	 Evaluating the structure and composition of the Board with regard to the 
balance of skills, diversity, knowledge and experience and making 
recommendations accordingly
•	 Drafting the job descriptions of all Board members
•	 Reviewing the time requirements of Non-Executive Directors
•	 Giving full consideration to succession planning
•	 Reviewing the leadership of the Group
The Committee is scheduled to meet once a year but it will meet more 
frequently if required.
The Committee reports to the Board on how it has discharged its 
responsibilities. The Committee’s written terms of reference are available on 
the Group’s website (www.joulesgroup.com).
ACTIVITY DURING THE YEAR
The primary activity of the Committee during the year centred around the 
recruitment of a successor to Marc Dench as Chief Financial Officer. A full 
search was conducted using a highly regarded firm of independent 
recruitment consultants (Spencer Stuart), and with the involvement of all 
members of the Board. The outcome of the search was the selection of 
Caroline York to succeed Marc, as announced on 7 April 2021.
In addition, the Committee responded to a request from Tom Joule to 
transition his role from Chief Brand Officer to Non-Executive Director. 
Recognising the importance of Tom’s input to the Group, as announced on 
3rd August 2021, the Committee has agreed a new arrangement whereby 
Tom will continue to serve on the Board in a non-executive capacity, whilst 
also remaining available as a strategic adviser to the Chief Executive Officer 
with regards to the development of Friends of Joules and the Garden Trading 
business. This additional commitment from Tom, beyond the scope of what 
would normally be expected of a Non-Executive Director, is estimated at 
one day per month.
Looking ahead, the Committee intends to focus its work in the forthcoming 
year on the following areas:
•	 Reviewing the structure and composition of the Board and its Committees
•	 Succession planning for the Board and the Joules’ senior leadership team
TERMS OF REFERENCE
The Committee will keep its terms of reference under review with the main 
objective of ensuring that an appropriate management framework and 
governance structure is in place.
IAN FILBY
Nomination Committee Chairman
NOMINATION COMMITTEE REPORT

61
Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
Dear Shareholders
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report (the ‘Report’) for the period ended 30 May 2021 (‘FY21’ or the 
‘Period’). Although the Company is listed on the Alternative Investment 
Market, and therefore not subject to the reporting regulations of fully listed 
companies in the UK, the Remuneration Committee has taken account of the 
regulations in the preparation of the Report as a matter of best practice. The 
information contained in this Report is unaudited.
This Report is presented as:
•	 Directors’ Remuneration Policy Report – setting out the parameters within 
which the remuneration arrangements for Directors operate; and
•	 An Annual Report on Remuneration – setting out the remuneration earned 
by Directors in respect of FY21 and how we intend to apply the Policy for 
FY22.
This Directors’ Remuneration Report will be put to an advisory shareholder 
vote at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting on 5 October 2021.
OUR APPROACH TO REMUNERATION – KEY PRINCIPLES
We take a rigorous and disciplined approach to ensure that the 
remuneration package for Executive Directors rewards the delivery of both 
short and long-term financial and strategic business goals that are consistent 
with the creation of shareholder value. 
Our policy on executive remuneration is designed to:
•	 include a competitive mix of base salary and short and long-term 
incentives, with an appropriate proportion of the package determined by 
stretching targets linked to the Group’s performance;
•	 promote the long-term success of the Group, in line with our strategy and 
focus on profitability and growth; and
•	 provide appropriate alignment between the interests of shareholders and 
executives, which is further enhanced through shareholding guidelines 
and the deferral of a proportion of the annual bonus as shares.
FY21 ANNUAL BONUS AND FY19 LTIP OUTCOME
As discussed in detail elsewhere in this Report, FY21 was a challenging year 
for the Group due to the COVID-19 pandemic. During the Period, the Group 
was able to mitigate the impact of the pandemic by taking a number of 
measures, including utilising Government support through the Coronavirus 
Job Retention Scheme (£4.6 million) and business rates relief (£2.3 million). 
This support has been taken into account by the Remuneration Committee 
when determining the Director’s remuneration for the year.
The annual bonus for FY21 was based on six performance measures: net 
cash, profit before tax (‘PBT’), colleague engagement, e-commerce 
reported revenue growth, number of active e-commerce customers and 
finalising the long-term digital and US strategy for the Group. Although the 
Group delivered good performance against targets in relation to most of 
these measures, the Remuneration Committee took the difficult decision that 
no bonus would be paid to Executive Directors in light of the impact of 
COVID-19 on the Group, the Government support received during the year 
and external stakeholder views.
The Company’s third long-term incentive awards were granted under the 
Long-Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’) in July 2018 (‘FY19 LTIP’) with vesting 
based on performance assessed over the period of three financial years 
ended on 30 May 2021. During the Period the Directors waived their FY19 
LTIPs, as explained later in this Report, and therefore these awards will not 
vest.
EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR SALARIES
Executive Directors’ base salaries were reviewed in April 2021 alongside 
the wider workforce. Given the current economic uncertainty as a result of 
COVID-19, it was decided that Executive Director salaries would remain 
unchanged and will be reviewed later in the year. Therefore, the current 
base salaries for Nick Jones and Tom Joule remain at £420,000 and 
£170,850. Tom’s salary reflects his part-time working hours (full time 
equivalent: £341,700). No salary increase was awarded to Marc Dench 
prior to his departure from the Group on 11 May 2021.
FY21 LTIP AWARDS
At the time of preparation of the FY20 Directors’ Remuneration Report, the 
arrangements for the Executive Director LTIP for FY21 were still being 
finalised. Following engagement with major shareholders, the FY21 LTIP 
awards were granted on 9 October 2020. Mindful of the critical time for the 
business, whilst navigating the pandemic, and the need to retain and 
motivate the Directors, the FY21 LTIP awards utilised the Committee’s 
exceptional LTIP limit, which allow awards of up to 300% of salary to be 
granted, and contain an additional performance condition linked to the 
grant value above the normal LTIP limit. Further details are set out herein.
BOARD CHANGES
As announced on 28 January 2021, Marc Dench resigned from his role 
during the year, stepping down from the Board and leaving the business on 
11 May 2021. The remuneration arrangements in respect of Marc’s 
departure, which are in line with the Group’s Directors’ Remuneration Policy, 
are summarised below:
•	 Existing LTIP Awards: As Marc Dench resigned from his role during the 
year, his existing LTIP award (being the FY21 LTIP) has lapsed. Marc’s 
FY19 and FY20 LTIP awards were waived during the year.
•	 FY21 bonus: No bonus is payable to Executive Directors in respect of 
FY21.
•	 Existing deferred bonus awards: Marc will retain his existing 
deferred share awards. In recognition of the fact that Marc was in 
service for the whole of the applicable bonus years, and that the 
deferred awards are not subject to further performance conditions, no 
reduction to the awards will be made as a result of Marc leaving before 
the end of the deferral period, which will vest in accordance with the 
originally anticipated timelines.
As announced on 7 April 2021, Caroline York joined Joules on 26 July 2021 
and has succeeded Marc Dench as Chief Financial Officer. The 
remuneration arrangements for Caroline are in line with the Group’s 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy. Caroline’s base salary is set at £250,000, 
the level required to secure her in role, taking into account her previous 
employment, and her salary will be kept under review to take account of her 
development in role. Caroline will be entitled to an annual bonus and LTIP 
opportunity for FY22 of 100% of base salary. The FY22 annual bonus 
opportunity will be pro-rated for the period of time served during the year. 
Given the one-off nature of the FY21 LTIP, Caroline will also be granted a 
delayed award under the FY21 LTIP, on a pro rata basis to reflect the 
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
STATEMENT FROM THE CHAIR OF THE 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE

62
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
proportion of the performance period during which she will be in role. The 
performance conditions for this award are consistent with all other 
participants. Caroline will be entitled to pension contributions of 3% of 
salary, in line with the contributions provided to the wider workforce.
As announced on 3 August 2021, Tom Joule’s role will change from Chief 
Brand Officer to Non-Executive Director with effect from September 2021. 
Tom will also remain available as a strategic adviser to the CEO with 
regards to the development of Friends of Joules and the Garden Trading 
business. Tom will be paid his existing salary until the date his role changes, 
but he will not be included in the Executive Director LTIP or bonus 
arrangements for FY22. Tom’s new remuneration arrangements for the 
remainder of FY22 are currently being finalised, but will be in line with the 
arrangements in place for the other Non-Executive Directors, and will be 
fully disclosed in the FY22 Director’s Remuneration Report.
REMUNERATION FOR THE YEAR COMMENCING 31 MAY 2021 
(‘FY22’)
A summary of the proposed application of our Remuneration Policy for FY22 
is set out below:
•	 Base salaries were reviewed in April 2021. Given the current economic 
uncertainty as a result of COVID-19, it was decided that Executive 
Director salaries would remain unchanged and will be reviewed later in 
the year.
•	 The maximum annual bonus opportunity for FY22 will be 100% of salary 
for Caroline York and 150% of salary for Nick Jones. Tom Joule will not 
participate in the FY22 annual bonus. The annual bonus will be subject 
to the achievement of certain targets which are currently being finalised. 
These targets will be disclosed in full in the FY22 Directors’ Remuneration 
Report. The Committee will have full discretion over the award and, in 
particular, will consider any payment in the context of overall business 
performance
•	 The maximum LTIP opportunity for FY22 is 100% of salary for Caroline 
York and 150% of salary for Nick Jones. Tom Joule will not participate in 
the FY22 LTIP. These awards will be subject to certain targets, which are 
currently being finalised. Details will be included in the regulatory 
announcement that accompanies the awards and will be fully disclosed 
in the FY22 Directors’ Remuneration Report. Reflecting best practice, the 
vesting of the awards will also be subject to a further underpin, that the 
vesting reflects the underlying financial performance of the Group over 
the performance period.
In determining remuneration packages and arrangements the Remuneration 
Committee adopts the principles set out in the Quoted Companies Alliance 
(‘QCA’) Corporate Governance Code and evolving best practice.
We remain committed to a responsible approach to executive pay as I trust 
that this Remuneration Report demonstrates and hope that we can rely on 
your continued support at our Annual General Meeting.
JILL LITTLE
Remuneration Committee Chairman
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
STATEMENT FROM THE CHAIR OF THE REMUNERATION COMMITTEE 
CONTINUED

63
Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
The following section sets out our Directors’ Remuneration Policy (the ‘Policy’).
The aim of the Policy is to align the interests of Executive Directors with the Group’s strategic vision and the long-term creation of shareholder value. The Policy 
is intended to remunerate Executive Directors competitively and appropriately for effective delivery of the strategy and allows them to share in this success and 
the value delivered to shareholders.
EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY
The table below sets out the elements of Executive Directors’ compensation and how each element operates, as well as the maximum opportunity for each 
element and any applicable performance measures.
FIXED REMUNERATION
ELEMENT, PURPOSE AND STRATEGIC LINK
OPERATION
MAXIMUM OPPORTUNITY
BASIC SALARY
To provide a competitive base salary for the 
markets in which the Group operates to attract 
and retain Executive Directors of a suitable 
calibre.
Usually reviewed annually taking account of:
•	 Group performance
•	 Role, experience and individual 
performance
•	 Competitive salary levels and market forces
•	 Pay and conditions elsewhere in the Group
Increases will normally be in line with the range 
of salary increases awarded (in percentage 
terms) to other Group employees. Increases 
above this level may be awarded to take 
account of individual circumstances, such as:
•	 Promotion
•	 Change in scope or increase in 
responsibilities
•	 An individual’s development or performance 
in role
•	 Alignment with the market over time
•	 A change in the size or complexity of the 
business
BENEFITS
To provide market-competitive benefits as part 
of the total remuneration package.
Executive Directors currently receive private 
medical insurance, company car or allowance, 
staff discounts and the right to participate in the 
Save As You Earn (‘SAYE’) scheme. Other 
benefits may be provided based on individual 
circumstances. For example, relocation or travel 
expenses.
Whilst the Committee has not set a maximum 
level of benefits that Executive Directors may 
receive, the value of benefits is set at a level 
which the Committee considers appropriate, 
considering market practice and individual 
circumstances.
RETIREMENT BENEFITS
To provide an appropriate level of retirement 
benefit (or cash allowance equivalent).
Executive Directors are eligible to participate in 
the Group defined contribution pension plan. 
Executive Directors may be permitted to take the 
benefit as cash in lieu of pension contributions.
In the case of any Executive Director appointed 
before 27 May 2019 (currently Tom Joule only), 
the Group contributes up to 5% of salary.
In the case of any external appointment as 
Executive Director on or after 27 May 2019 
(currently Nick Jones and Caroline York), the 
Group contributes up to a percentage of salary 
not exceeding the retirement benefit provision 
for the wider workforce (currently 3% of salary).
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY REPORT

64
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
VARIABLE REMUNERATION
ELEMENT, PURPOSE AND STRATEGIC LINK
OPERATION
MAXIMUM OPPORTUNITY AND 
PERFORMANCE METRICS
ANNUAL BONUS
Rewards performance against targets which 
support the strategic direction of the Group.
Deferral provides a retention element through 
share ownership and direct alignment with 
shareholders’ interests.
Awards are based on performance (typically 
measured over one year) against targets 
determined by the Committee at the start of the 
Period.
Pay-out levels are determined by the Committee 
after the year end. The Committee has discretion 
to amend pay-outs should any formulaic output 
not reflect their assessment of performance.
A proportion of any bonus is paid in cash with 
the balance paid in the form of shares (subject to 
a de minimis amount of £10,000) usually 
deferred for three years. Deferred share awards 
may include dividend equivalents earned 
between the grant and vesting date.
Overall maximum is up to 150% of base salary 
under the Policy.
Performance measure:
Targets are set annually and aligned with key 
financial, strategic and/or individual targets with 
the weightings between these measures 
determined by the Committee each year 
considering the Group’s priorities at the time.
LONG-TERM INCENTIVE PLAN (‘LTIP’)
To create alignment between the interests of 
Executive Directors and shareholders through the 
delivery of performance-based awards in 
Group shares
Awards can be made in the form of conditional 
share awards or nil cost options over shares. 
Vesting is subject to the achievement of specified 
performance conditions normally over three 
years.
Awards may be structured as a ‘Qualifying LTIP’ 
comprising of an HMRC tax-qualifying option 
and an LTIP award, with the vesting of the LTIP 
award scaled back to take account of any gain 
made on the exercise of the tax-qualifying 
option.
The Committee has discretion to vary the 
formulaic vesting output applying to any LTIP 
award granted from FY21 onwards where it 
believes the outcome does not reflect the 
Committee’s overall assessment of business 
performance or is not appropriate in the context 
of circumstances that were unexpected or 
unforeseen at the date of grant. This discretion 
does not apply to any tax-qualifying options 
granted as part of a Qualifying LTIP award as 
described below where such discretion would 
not be permitted in accordance with the 
applicable tax legislation.
Awards may include dividend equivalents 
earned between the grant and vesting date.
Normal maximum is up to 150% of base salary 
under the Policy. In exceptional circumstances, 
awards of up to 300% of salary may be 
granted.
Where an award is structured as a Qualifying 
LTIP, the shares subject to the tax-qualifying 
option element are excluded for the purposes of 
this limit, reflecting the scale back.
Currently none of the Executive Director awards 
are structured as a Qualifying LTIP.
Performance measure:
Set to reflect longer-term strategy and business 
performance. Performance measures and their 
weighting are reviewed annually to maintain 
appropriateness and relevance.
For threshold levels of performance, 25% of the 
award will vest rising to 100% for maximum 
performance. Below the threshold, the award 
will not vest.
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY REPORT CONTINUED

65
Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
FURTHER INFORMATION IN RELATION TO THE EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY
EXPLANATION OF PERFORMANCE MEASURES CHOSEN FOR ELEMENTS OF REMUNERATION
Performance measures are selected for the annual bonus and long-term incentive plan to reflect the Group’s strategy. Stretching performance targets are set 
each year by the Committee, considering several different factors. Stretch targets for the maximum awards under the annual bonus are set against 
outperformance of internal Company forecasts.
Due to the ongoing uncertainty as a result of the pandemic, the Committee has not yet finalised the performance measures and targets for the FY22 LTIP and 
annual bonus. However, the Committee will disclose details of the targets in full in the FY22 Directors’ Remuneration Report and, in the case of the FY22 LTIP, 
in the regulatory announcement that accompanies the awards. Consistent with previous awards, the vesting of the FY22 awards will also be subject to a 
further underpin, that the vesting reflects the underlying financial performance of the Group over the performance period.
The Committee retains the discretion to adjust or set different performance measures or targets where it considers it appropriate to do so. For example, to 
reflect a change in strategy, a material acquisition and/or a divestment of a Group business or change in prevailing market conditions and to assess 
performance on a fair and consistent basis from year to year. Awards may be adjusted in the event of a variation of share capital in accordance with the rules 
of the deferred bonus plan (‘DBP’) and LTIP.
APPLICATION OF MALUS AND CLAWBACK
The malus and clawback provisions described below relate to awards in respect of FY21 and future years. The malus and clawback provisions which apply to 
prior years’ awards are set out in earlier Directors’ Remuneration Reports.
The ‘Clawback Period’ is: 
i) in respect of the LTIP: a period of two years after the vesting of an LTIP award, and
ii) in respect of the annual bonus: up to three years following the payment of the cash element, and until the vesting date for any deferred share award. 
During the Clawback Period, the Committee may require the repayment of all or some of the award if there is corporate failure, a material error or 
misstatement of the financial results, gross misconduct, reputational damage, a material failure of risk management or if information comes to light which, had it 
been known, would have affected a decision as to the extent to which an award would have vested. The same provisions apply for the application of malus.
OPERATION OF SHARE PLANS
The Committee may operate the Company’s share plans in accordance with their terms. This includes the ability to amend the terms of awards under those 
plans in accordance with the plan rules in the event of a variation of share capital, and to settle awards, in whole or in part, in cash or grant awards as cash 
equivalents (although the Committee would only settle or grant an Executive Director’s award in cash in exceptional circumstances such as where there was a 
regulatory restriction on the delivery of shares).
SHAREHOLDING GUIDELINES
To promote further alignment with shareholders’ interests and share ownership, each Executive Director is required to build and maintain a shareholding equal 
to two times the value of their annual base salary. Until this guideline is met Executive Directors will be required to retain half of any shares which vest under the 
deferred bonus or LTIP (after sales to cover tax).
LEGACY REMUNERATION
The Committee has the right to settle remuneration arrangements that were put in place prior to this Policy coming into effect and in respect of remuneration 
awarded to individuals prior to becoming an Executive Director (and which was not awarded in anticipation of becoming an Executive Director).
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY
The remuneration policy for the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors is to pay fees necessary to attract the individual of the calibre required, taking into 
consideration the size and complexity of the business and the time commitment of the role, without paying more than is necessary. Details are set out in the 
table below:
APPROACH TO 
SETTING FEES
•	 The fees of the Non-Executive Directors are agreed by the Chairman and CEO and the fees for the Chairman are 
determined by the Board as a whole.
•	 Fees are set taking into account the level of responsibility, relevant experience and specialist knowledge of each 
Non-Executive Director and fees at companies of a similar size and complexity.
BASIS OF FEES
•	 Non-Executive Directors are paid a basic fee for membership of the Board with additional fees being paid for 
chairmanship of Board Committees.
•	 Additional fees may also be paid for other Board responsibilities or roles.
•	 Fees are normally paid in cash.
OTHER
•	 Non-Executive Directors may be eligible to receive benefits such as travel, the use of secretarial support and other 
expenses relevant to the performance of their roles.
•	 Neither the Chairman nor any of the Non-Executive Directors are eligible to participate in any of the Group’s incentive 
arrangements.

66
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
APPROACH TO RECRUITMENT REMUNERATION
The Policy aims to facilitate the appointment of individuals of sufficient calibre to lead the business and execute the strategy effectively for the benefit of 
shareholders. When appointing a new Executive Director the Committee seeks to ensure that arrangements are in the best interests of the Group and not to 
pay more than is appropriate. The Committee will take into consideration relevant factors, which may include the calibre of the individual, their existing 
remuneration package, and their specific circumstances, including the jurisdiction from which they are recruited.
The Committee will typically seek to align the remuneration package with the Group’s Remuneration Policy. The Committee may make payments or awards to 
recognise or ‘buy-out’ remuneration packages forfeited on leaving a previous employer. The Committee’s intention is that such awards would be made on a 
‘like-for-like’ basis as those forfeited.
The remuneration package for a newly appointed Chairman or Non-Executive Director will normally be in line with the structure set out in the Non-Executive 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy.
SERVICE CONTRACTS
Each of the Executive Directors has a service contract with the Group. The notice period of Executive Directors’ service will not exceed 12 months. All 
Non-Executive Directors have fixed term agreements with the Group for no more than three years which may be extended at the Board’s discretion and 
subject to re-election by shareholders at the AGM. Details of the Directors’ current service contracts, and fixed term agreements, are set out below:
NAME
COMMENCEMENT
NOTICE PERIOD
Tom Joule*
20 May 2016
12 months
Nick Jones
2 September 2019
12 months
Caroline York
26 July 2021
6 months
Ian Filby
1 August 2021
3 months
Jill Little
22 May 2019
1 month
David Stead
11 April 2019
1 month
*The intention is that Tom Joule will move onto a new agreement with effect from September 2021 to reflect the change in his role to Non-Executive Director.
PAYMENTS FOR LOSS OF OFFICE
Payments for loss of office will be in line with the provisions of the Executive Directors’ service contracts and the rules of the share plans. In general, ‘good 
leaver’ provisions will apply in circumstances of death, injury, ill-health, disability, change of control or for any other reason at the Committee’s discretion, 
taking into account performance (in the case of long-term incentive awards) and the proportion of the vesting period served. Where a payment is made then 
the leaver provisions would be determined at the time of the award.
In appropriate circumstances, payments may also be made in respect of accrued holiday, outplacement, legal fees and under the terms of the SAYE plan. The 
Committee reserves the right to make additional payments where such payments are made in good faith in discharge of an existing legal obligation (or by 
way of damages for breach of such an obligation) or by way of settlement or compromise of any claim arising in connection with the termination of the 
Director’s office or employment.
Where the Committee retains discretion, it will be used to provide flexibility in certain situations, considering the circumstances of the Director’s departure and 
performance. There is no entitlement to any compensation in the event of Non-Executive Directors’ contracts not being renewed or the agreement terminating 
earlier.
CONSULTATION WITH SHAREHOLDERS
The Committee will consider shareholder feedback received on remuneration matters. The Committee will seek to engage directly with major shareholders 
and their representative bodies should any material changes be made to the Policy.
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY REPORT CONTINUED

67
Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE OF REMUNERATION
The table below details the total remuneration earned by each Director in respect of FY21 and FY20.
£’000
SALARIES/FEES
TAXABLE 
BENEFITS
PENSION3
ANNUAL BONUS 
(INCLUDING 
DEFERRED 
BONUS)
LTIP
ONE-OFF 
AWARDS4
TOTAL 
REMUNERATION5
FY21
FY20
FY21
FY20
FY21
FY20
FY21
FY20
FY21
FY20
FY21
FY20
FY21
FY20
Executive 
Directors
Tom Joule
170.9
284.8
10.8
21.0
8.5
17.1
–
–
–
–
–
–
190.2
322.9
Colin Porter1
n/a
146.6
n/a
12.6
n/a
7.3
n/a
–
n/a
–
n/a
–
n/a
166.5
Nick Jones1
420.0
294.0
17.3
12.6
12.6
9.5
–
–
–
–
–
223.1
449.9
539.2
Marc Dench2
270.3
256.8
20.5
16.7
13.5
12.8
–
–
–
–
–
33.8
304.3
320.1
Non-Executive 
Directors
Ian Filby
100.0
120.0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
100.0
120.0
Jill Little
41.7
50.0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
41.7
50.0
David Stead
45.8
45.8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
45.8
45.8
Total
1048.7
1198.0
48.6
62.9
34.6
46.7
0
0
0
0
0
256.9
1131.9
1564.5
1.	
Colin Porter retired as CEO, and Nick Jones was appointed as CEO, with effect from 30 September 2019. Nick Jones’ remuneration in the table above reflects his remuneration from 2 September 2019, 
the date on which he joined the Company. Colin Porter’s remuneration in the table above reflects his remuneration to his last day of employment with the Company, which was 31 October 2019.
2.	
Marc Dench resigned as CFO and as an employee of Joules with effect from 11 May 2021.
3.	
Includes sums paid into a pension scheme and/or pension allowance
4.	
The one-off awards reflect one-off share awards granted in FY20. For Marc Dench, this was an award in respect of salary waived during the year. For Nick Jones, this includes his buyout award and an 
award in respect of salary waived during FY20. In response to shareholder feedback, during FY21 Nick Jones and Marc Dench both agreed to waive the awards in lieu of salary.
5.	
Once the value of the waived awards in lieu of salary (referred to at footnote 4 above) have been deducted, the total remuneration for FY20 for Nick Jones and Marc Dench was £487k and £286k 
respectively.
EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE OF REMUNERATION TABLE
BASE SALARIES
A salary review took place in April 2021 together with the wider workforce. Given the unprecedented COVID-19 situation, it was decided that the Executive 
Director salaries would remain the same. Accordingly, each Executive Director’s rate of salary with effect from 1 April 2021 remains the same as at 1 April 
2020 as set out in the following table.
EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
BASE SALARY AT 
1 APRIL 2021
BASE SALARY AT 
1 APRIL 2020
Tom Joule*
£341,700
£341,700
Nick Jones
£420,000
£420,000
Marc Dench
£270,300
£270,300
*	
With effect from 1 June 2020, Tom Joule moved to a reduced working pattern, with a time commitment of approximately 50%. Tom’s salary has been pro rated accordingly, his salary is therefore 
£170,850.
Each of the Executive Directors agreed to take a pay reduction to assist the business with cash flow during the COVID-19 crisis. Tom Joule took a 100% pay 
reduction for the months of April and May 2020. Nick Jones and Marc Dench each took a 30% pay reduction for the months of April–July 2020 (inclusive). 
This action was greatly supportive of the business at the time. However, in light of strong performance in FY21, it was subsequently agreed that the sums 
waived in respect of FY21 (June and July 2020 for Nick Jones and Marc Dench) would be repaid. In the single total figure of remuneration table, salaries for 
FY20 and FY21 represent the total figure paid or payable in respect of the relevant financial year.
TAXABLE BENEFITS
The taxable benefits for the Executive Directors included a company car or car allowance, private fuel, clothing allowance and private medical insurance.
ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION

68
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
ANNUAL BONUS
For FY21 the maximum annual bonus opportunity for the Executive Directors was 100% of base salary for Tom Joule and Marc Dench and 150% of base 
salary for Nick Jones based on six performance measures: net cash, PBT, colleague engagement, e-commerce reported revenue growth, number of active 
e-commerce customers and finalising the long-term digital and US strategy for the Group.
The structure and targets for the FY21 annual bonus, are set out in the table below.
In light of COVID-19 and the ongoing uncertainty affecting the retail sector, the Committee determined that it was not possible to set appropriately robust 
threshold and maximum targets. As such, a target performance level was set, and the Remuneration Committee completed a discretionary assessment based 
on performance relative to this level.
PERFORMANCE MEASURE
TARGET
ACTUAL PERFORMANCE
PBT (stated before IFRS 16, share-based compensation 
and exceptional items)
£6.5 million 
£8.3 million
Net cash (as disclosed in statutory reporting)
Net cash >£0 at year end FY21.
£4.1 million
Colleague Engagement (based on April 2021 survey)
BCI score: 715 (mid 2*)
BCI Score: 716 (mid 2*)
E-commerce reported revenue growth (not including 
Garden Trading)
21%
48%
Active e-commerce customers (not including Garden 
Trading)
1,037,000
1.3 million
Long-term digital and international strategy for the 
Group documented and approved by the Board
Finalised and approved by the Board by end of year
Documenting the strategy is a work in 
progress
Although the Group delivered good performance against targets in relation to most of these measures, the Remuneration Committee determined that no bonus 
would be paid to Executive Directors in light of the impact of COVID-19 on the Group and the Government support received during the year.
LONG-TERM INCENTIVES
Long-term incentives vesting in respect of performance in FY21
Tom Joule and Marc Dench were granted awards under the Joules 2016 Long Term Incentive Plan on 26 July 2018 (‘FY19 LTIP’). Each award was subject to a 
performance condition based on i) the Company’s earnings per share (‘EPS’) and ii) international revenue, in the financial year ended 30 May 2021, being 
the final financial year of a three-year performance period. Tom and Marc waived their existing LTIP Awards during the year, so the FY19 LTIP will not vest.
Long-term incentive awards granted during FY21
In FY21, the Committee granted LTIP awards as set out in the table below. The share price used to calculate the awards was £1.25, being based on a 
premium of around 12% to the share price on the day prior to the day the awards were granted.
The FY21 LTIP consists of an award at the ‘normal’ level with performance conditions based on cumulative, adjusted EPS (diluted shares) (‘Cumulative EPS 
Target’) and, given the exceptional circumstances as a result of COVID-19 and in order to provide a motivating incentive for the executive team, the 
Committee decided to utilise the new exceptional LTIP limit by introducing an additional ‘superstretch’ performance condition, based on the share price at the 
end of the performance period. The intention of the award is to focus participants on what the Committee believes to be challenging EPS and share price 
targets over the next three-year period during a critical time for the Company.
The superstretch share price element of the awards was offered on the basis that it will only vest if the maximum target is achieved or exceeded under the 
Cumulative EPS Target. The FY21 LTIP awards granted were as follows:
FY21 LTIP
DATE OF GRANT
% OF SALARY
NUMBER OF SHARES
Tom Joule
9 October 2020
200%
273,360
Marc Dench*
9 October 2020
250%
540,600
Nick Jones
9 October 2020
300%
1,008,000
*	
As Marc Dench resigned from his role during the year, his FY21 LTIP has lapsed in full. 
ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

69
Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
Vesting of the awards will be based upon achievement against two targets as summarised below.
TARGET ELEMENTS
% OF AWARD
THRESHOLD
25% VESTING OF AWARD
MAXIMUM
100% VESTING OF AWARD
Cumulative EPS¹
50%
23 pence
35 pence
Share Price²
50%
£2
(in addition to Cumulative EPS of 35p)
£4
(in addition to Cumulative EPS of 35p)
1 	
Cumulative, diluted, adjusted earnings per share (‘EPS’) for the period FY21–FY23. Adjusted EPS represents statutory EPS calculated before the impact of share-based payments, IFRS 16 and exceptional 
administrative expenses.
2 	
Calculated based on 90-day volume weighted average price of Joules shares to the end of the performance period (FY23). 
The share price element of the award will only vest if the maximum under the Cumulative EPS Target has been met or exceeded. The Remuneration Committee 
has the discretion to reduce the extent of vesting if, in its opinion, the extent of vesting is not reflective of underlying financial performance over the 
performance period or to ensure the value of the award on vesting does not exceed £5 million.
DEFERRED BONUS AWARDS GRANTED IN FY21
As the FY20 annual bonus did not pay out, the Executive Directors did not receive deferred bonus awards in FY21.
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR FEES
The Non-Executive Directors agreed to waive or defer part or all of their fee to assist the business with cash flow during the COVID-19 crisis for the last two 
months of FY20 and/or the first two months of FY21. The fees stated in the single total figure of remuneration table include deferred amounts but exclude any 
amounts which were waived.
PAYMENTS MADE TO FORMER DIRECTORS AND PAYMENTS FOR LOSS OF OFFICE MADE DURING THE YEAR
Marc Dench was an Executive Director and employee of the Company until 11 May 2021. Marc worked his notice period and left the business as an 
employee on 11 May 2021, he was paid up to the end of the financial year as he agreed to remain available to the Company on a consultancy basis until 
July 2021 to assist with the preparation of the accounts and the transition to the new CFO. The single total figure of remuneration table includes all 
remuneration earned by him in respect of FY21.
No other payments were made in the year to any former Director of the Group and no payments were made in the year for loss of office.
STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ SHAREHOLDING AND SHARE INTERESTS
The interests of the Directors and their immediate families in the Group’s Ordinary Shares as at 30 May 2021 (or, if earlier, the date of their retirement or 
resignation) were as follows:
BENEFICIALLY 
OWNED AT 
31 MAY 2020
NO. OF SHARES
BENEFICIALLY 
OWNED AT 
30 MAY 20212
NO. OF SHARES
UNVESTED 
SHARE AWARDS 
SUBJECT TO 
PERFORMANCE 
CONDITIONS AS 
AT 30 MAY 2021
UNVESTED 
SHARE AWARDS 
NOT SUBJECT TO 
PERFORMANCE 
CONDITIONS1 
AS AT 30 MAY 
20212
VESTED, 
UNEXERCISED 
SHARE AWARDS
AS AT 30 MAY 
20212
NUMBER OF 
AWARDS 
COUNTING 
TOWARDS 
SHAREHOLDING 
REQUIREMENT3 
AS AT 30 MAY 
20212
SHAREHOLDING 
GUIDELINES 
MET4
Executive 
Directors
Tom Joule
29,498,433
24,248,433
273,360
87,995
51,455
24,322,342
Yes
Nick Jones
93,750
93,750
1,008,000
128,618
nil
161,918
No
Non-Executive 
Directors
Ian Filby
nil
50,000
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Jill Little
25,625
38,125
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
David Stead
31,250
68,750
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Former Directors
Marc Dench
281,398
309,206
nil
106,065
nil
n/a
n/a
1	
Includes: Deferred bonus share awards and, in the case of Nick Jones, the ‘joining award’ granted to him as part compensation for share awards which would have vested had he remained with his 
former employer.
2	
Or, if earlier, date of retirement or resignation.
3	
Equal to the total of beneficially owned shares, unvested share awards not subject to performance conditions (on a net of tax basis) and vested but unexercised share awards (on a net of tax basis).
4	
Calculated based on the shareholding requirement of 200% of salary, a closing share price of £2.78 on Friday 28 May 2021 and the Executive Director’s base salary at 30 May 2021.
The interests of the current Directors and their immediate families in the Group’s Ordinary Shares did not change between 30 May 2021 and the date this 
Report was approved on 2 August 2021.

70
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
IMPLEMENTATION OF POLICY FOR FY22
BASE SALARY
As noted previously, Executive Directors’ base salaries were reviewed in April 2021 alongside the wider workforce. Given the current economic uncertainty 
as a result of COVID-19, it was decided that Executive Directors' salaries would remain unchanged and will be reviewed later in the year.
EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
BASE SALARY AT 1 APRIL 2021²
BASE SALARY AS AT 1 JUNE 2020
BASE SALARY AT 1 APRIL 2020
Tom Joule¹
£341,700
£341,700
£341,700
Nick Jones
£420,000
£420,000
£420,000
Caroline York
£250,000
n/a
n/a
1	
With effect from 1 June 2020, Tom Joule moved to a reduced working pattern, with a time commitment of approximately 50%. The table above sets out Tom’s full time equivalent salary, his prorated salary 
is £170,850.
2 	
Or commencement of employment date in the case of Caroline York
ANNUAL BONUS
For FY22 the annual bonus opportunity will be up to a maximum of 100% of salary for Caroline York, and 150% of salary for Nick Jones. Tom Joule will not be 
included in the bonus arrangement for FY22 due to his planned move to a Non-Executive role from September 2021. The annual bonus will be subject to the 
achievement of certain targets, with payment made half in cash and half deferred into shares (vesting after a further three years).
The FY22 annual bonus targets are in the process of being finalised by the Committee and are not disclosed in advance due to commercial confidentiality 
reasons, but will be disclosed when we report the performance out-turn in the FY22 Directors’ Remuneration Report.
LONG-TERM INCENTIVE
For FY22, the Committee intends to grant LTIP awards of 150% of salary for Nick Jones and 100% of salary for Caroline York. Tom Joule will not participate in 
the FY22 LTIP. The performance targets for the FY22 LTIP awards are in the process of being finalised by the Committee and will be disclosed in the regulatory 
announcement that accompanies the awards and will be fully disclosed in the FY22 Directors’ Remuneration Report.
In addition to the performance targets, the vesting of the awards will also be subject to a further underpin, that the vesting reflects the underlying financial 
performance of the Group over the performance period. In line with the Policy, the Committee will have discretion to vary the formulaic vesting output 
applying to the awards.
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR FEES
Details of Non-Executive Directors’ fees for FY22 are set out below:
•	 Chairman’s fee: £120,000
•	 Non-Executive Director fee: £45,000
•	 Additional fee for chair of a Board Committee: £5,000
•	 Additional fee for Senior Independent Director: £5,000
Details of the remuneration arrangements for Tom Joule from September 2021, when he moves to his new Non-Executive role, are in the process of being 
finalised, and will be disclosed in the FY22 Directors’ Remuneration Report.
ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION CONTINUED

71
Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
SHAREHOLDER APPROVAL OF THE DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
At the 2020 Annual General Meeting, the votes in respect of the FY20 Directors’ Remuneration Report were as follows.
FY21 DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
NUMBER
%
For
61,528,929
72.18
Against
23,714,197
27.82
Withheld
4,181,698
N/A
As part of an engagement exercise last year, shareholder feedback raised concerns about the share awards granted to Nick Jones and Marc Dench in April 
2020 in lieu of salary they had waived during FY20. In response to this feedback, the awards were waived by Nick and Marc.
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
The members of the Committee are Jill Little (Chair), Ian Filby and David Stead. The Group’s General Counsel attends the meeting as secretary to the 
Committee. The Committee meets at least once a year and has responsibility for:
•	 Maintaining the Remuneration Policy;
•	 Reviewing and determining the remuneration packages of the Executive Directors;
•	 Monitoring the level and structure of the remuneration of Senior Management; and
•	 Production of the Annual Report on Directors’ remuneration.
The Executive Directors also attend meetings when required and provide information and support as requested. No Executive Director is present when his 
remuneration package is considered.
The duties of the Remuneration Committee are set out in its terms of reference, which are available on the Group’s website (www.joulesgroup.com) and are 
also available on request from the Company Secretary.
This Report was approved by the Board on 2 August 2021.
JILL LITTLE
Remuneration Committee Chairman
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT
GOVERNANCE

72
DIRECTORS’ REPORT
The Directors present their Annual Report on the affairs of the Group, 
together with the financial statements and Auditor’s Report, for the 52 weeks 
ended 30 May 2021 (‘FY21’). The Governance Framework Section also 
forms part of this Directors’ Report.
DIRECTORS
The Directors of the Company during the period under review, and 
subsequently to the date of this Report, were:
Ian Filby
Tom Joule
Nick Jones
Marc Dench (resigned with effect from 11 May 2021)
Caroline York (joined 26 July 2021)
David Stead
Jill Little
RESULTS AND DIVIDENDS
Results for the Period ended 30 May 2021 are set out in the Consolidated 
Income Statement on page 84. The Directors are not recommending a 
dividend for FY21.
ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION
A copy of the full Articles of Association (‘Articles’) are available on request 
from the Company Secretary and are also available on the Group’s website 
www.joulesgroup.com. Any amendments to the Articles can be made by a 
special resolution of the Shareholders.
SHARE CAPITAL AND SUBSTANTIAL SHAREHOLDERS
Details of the issued share capital, together with details of the movements 
during the year, are shown in Note 21 to the Consolidated Financial 
Statements. The Company has one class of Ordinary Shares and each 
Ordinary Share carries the right to one vote at general meetings of the 
Company.
At 30 May 2021 the Company had been notified of the following 
substantial shareholders comprising 3% or more of the issued Ordinary 
Share capital of the Company:
% OF ISSUED 
SHARE CAPITAL
Tom Joule (and related trusts)
21.74%
Blackrock
12.21%
Octopus Investments
10.41%
Canaccord Genuity
10.06%
Aberdeen Standard
6.67%
Janus Henderson
4.31%
Columbia Threadneedle Investments
3.99%
River and Mercantile Asset Management
3.15%
There have been no significant changes to substantial shareholders since the 
year end.
ACQUISITION OF THE COMPANY’S OWN SHARES
At the Annual General Meeting (‘AGM’) held on 23 September 2020, the 
Company was authorised, in accordance with section 701 of the 
Companies Act 2006 (the ‘Act’), to make market purchases (within the 
meaning of section 693(4) of the Act) of up to 10,813,592 Ordinary Shares 
(being approximately 10 per cent of the Share Capital) on such terms and in 
such manner as the Directors of the Company may from time to time 
determine. This authority was not used during the year or up to the date of 
this report. Shareholders will be asked to renew this authority at the AGM as 
detailed in the next AGM Notice. The Company held no treasury shares 
during the year.
DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS
Details of the Directors’ beneficial interests are set out in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report.
DIRECTORS’ INDEMNITIES AND DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS’ 
LIABILITY INSURANCE
The Company has purchased directors’ and officers’ liability insurance 
during the year as allowed by the Company’s Articles.
FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
Details of the Directors’ assessment of the principal risks and uncertainties 
which could impact the business are outlined in the Principal Risks and 
Uncertainties section of this Annual Report. The Board manages internal risk 
through the ongoing review of the Group’s risk register and the Board 
manages external risk through the monitoring of the economic and 
regulatory environment and market conditions.
GOING CONCERN AND VIABILITY STATEMENT – IMPACT OF 
COVID-19
As for many businesses in the retail sector, the Group has continued to be 
significantly impacted by COVID-19 during the Period. The impact and 
management’s response is set out in further detail within the Chief Executive’s 
Report and the Financial Review.
Despite the easing of the UK’s lockdown and the re-opening of non essential 
retail in mid-April 2021, the retail sector continues to face significant 
uncertainties, including short-term and potentially more fundamental 
long-term changes in consumer behaviour as well as the potential for 
ongoing operational disruption. Given these uncertainties, the Directors 
have undertaken a comprehensive assessment to consider the going 
concern and longer-term viability of the Group and Company. In making 
their assessment the Directors have considered the following:
•	 The Group’s financial position, as at the date of this Report, and its 
committed borrowing facilities available for the time period under 
consideration;
•	 The support from the Group’s shareholders and bank, including the 
successful equity placing that was completed in the early stages of the 
UK lockdown during the prior period, and the financing facility extension 
that was completed in April 2021;
•	 Alternative sources of financing, including sale & leaseback of freehold 
property and asset financing that might reasonably be assumed to be 
available to the Group – noting that any financing from these sources 
has not been included within the forecasts that support the going concern 
assessment;
DIRECTORS’ REPORT

73
Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
DIRECTORS’ REPORT
•	 Financial commitments, including capital commitments, lease 
commitments, stock purchases and other non-variable/non-discretionary 
costs. In respect of property leases, the Directors note the relatively short 
lease commitments, of less than three years on average, that the Group 
has across its store portfolio together with recent and on-going progress 
on renewing leases on favourable terms;
•	 The extent of potential Government support initiatives including business 
rates relief and the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (‘CJRS’);
•	 Strength of brand, reflected in active customer growth, brand awareness 
and brand health metrics – as detailed more fully in the Strategic Review;
•	 The flexibility and agility of the Group’s business model, as described in 
the Strategic Review, noting that over two-thirds of the Group’s retail 
sales are via e-commerce and that the Group has diversified sources of 
revenue, operating across several channels and geographic markets, 
with owned and third-party channels including wholesale and 
marketplaces. Newer income streams of brand licensing and the Group’s 
Friends of Joules digital marketplace, and from Garden Trading, 
following the acquisition in February 2021, provide additional comfort 
on the strength of the brand and diversity of income channels.
The Directors have also considered the trading performance of the Group’s 
stores as they have reopened following the easing of the UK’s lockdown 
restrictions on 12 April 2021, as well as the performance of the Group’s 
e-commerce channel, which has continued to exceed management’s 
expectations during the Period.
The Directors have reviewed management’s business plan forecasts that 
cover the period to 26 May 2024, being the Group’s strategic plan horizon. 
The forecasts have been produced on the following basis:
•	 Base plan – a gradual sales recovery post-COVID-19, continuing the 
trend experienced since the UK’s lockdown restrictions were eased in 
mid-April 2021, reflecting management’s estimates for the speed and 
extent of recovery across its different sales channels and markets. It 
reflects stores being open throughout the period under review initially 
trading significantly below the comparative pre-COVID-19 period, 
improving to approximately 80% of pre-COVID-19 sales levels by the 
end of FY22, with modest growth thereafter. Third-party wholesale 
channels are assumed to follow a similar trajectory. The Group’s 
e-commerce sales are forecast to grow at double-digit levels reflecting 
performance over recent years and experienced during the UK’s latest 
lockdown in January to March 2021;
•	 Downside scenario – the ‘base plan’ adjusted to reflect a further UK 
lockdown for three months during October to December 2021 with all 
non-essential retail closed during the Group’s key trading period, 
followed by a much slower recovery of the Group’s stores channel with 
total store revenues only achieving approximately 60% of the pre-
COVID-19 levels by the end of FY24. Ecommerce sales growth is 
assumed to be at half of the ‘Base plan’ levels and wholesale sales are 
assumed to reduce significantly during FY22 compared to the ‘Base 
plan’.
Within each forecast, management have reflected financial commitments 
and the impact of realised or anticipated cost savings from discretionary and 
variable costs. No Government support or subsidies, other than those 
announced and committed at the date of this Report, are included.
The Directors have also stress tested the forecast to consider situations under 
which the Company would have insufficient liquidity under its current 
secured borrowing facilities and/or it would not meet its banking covenant 
tests. One such ‘stress test scenario’ is that of an even further extended 
potential COVID-19 related lockdown in the UK for up to six months, with a 
material disruption to retail store operations during the peak Autumn/Winter 
2021 trading season resulting in significantly reduced store channel revenue 
and lower receipts from the Group’s wholesale channels. The stress test 
scenario assumes e-commerce revenue growth in line with the ‘downside 
scenario’ noting that loyal customers would no longer access the brand via 
the store environment – as demonstrated during the previous UK lockdowns, 
plus ongoing income from Garden Trading, brand licensing and digital 
marketplace activities. The stress test scenario assumes that the Group would 
only reduce directly related variable sales costs during the period and does 
not assume any further cost mitigation actions which would be available to 
the Group. No additional Government support or subsidies to offset costs or 
support cash flow are assumed in this scenario. 
The Directors believe, with reference to the considerations noted above, that, 
firstly the likelihood of this situation arising in its most extreme form is remote 
and, secondly, that they anticipate that the Group would be able to adapt 
and respond to mitigate the impacts and continue to trade and meet its 
obligations through the period of consideration.
GOING CONCERN
The base plan and downside scenario forecasts indicate that the Group will 
remain within its available committed borrowing facilities and in compliance 
with covenants throughout the forthcoming 12-month period. Under the 
downside scenario, the Group has more than £20 million available liquidity 
headroom throughout the period under consideration and has EBITDA 
headroom of £2.7 million against its May 2022 year-end covenant test, and 
headroom of £5.6 million at its first covenant test in the period at the end of 
November 2021.
The Group would also remain within its borrowing facilities and comply with 
covenants under the stress test through this period.
Following consideration of these forecasts and having made appropriate 
enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company 
has adequate resources to continue in operational existence until at least 12 
months after the approval of the Financial Statements. Therefore, the 
Directors continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in 
preparing the Consolidated Financial Statements.
VIABILITY STATEMENT
The Directors have considered the Group’s prospects and viability over a 
three-year period to 26 May 2024. This three-year period is considered 
appropriate as i) this is the Group’s longer term strategic planning period 
and ii) the Group’s £25 million revolving credit facility with Barclays Bank 
PLC, has recently been extended out to September 2024 which covers the 
three-year period of the review. 
As set out in detail in the “Going concern and viability statement – impact of 
COVID-19” section above, the Directors have produced and reviewed 
forecasts which consider the impact of further UK lockdowns (of both 3- and 
6-month periods), slow recovery thereafter and no additional Government 
support or subsidies.

74
DIRECTORS’ REPORT
Under the Base plan and the Downside scenarios, outlined in more detail 
above, the Group will remain within its available committed borrowing 
facilities and in compliance with covenants throughout the forecast period. 
Based on this assessment, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that 
the Group will continue in operation and meet all its liabilities as they fall due 
during the period up to 26 May 2024.
POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS
Since the Period end, the Group has disposed of the property acquired as 
part of the acquisition of The Garden Trading Company Limited, which was 
recognised as an asset held for sale in the Consolidated Statement of 
Financial Position as at 30 May 2021.
Completion of the new head office for the Group took place in June 2021.
ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING
The Company’s AGM will be held on 5 October 2021.
FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS IN THE BUSINESS OF THE COMPANY
The Strategic Report in Chapter 1 of this Annual Report sets out the likely 
future developments of the Company.
CHANGE OF CONTROL
So far as the Directors are aware, there are no arrangements in place that 
the operation of which at a later date may result in a change of control of the 
Company.
BRANCHES OUTSIDE THE UK
In addition to subsidiary companies in the USA, China, Republic of Ireland 
and Hong Kong, the Group has branches in France and the Republic of 
Ireland.
POLITICAL DONATIONS
No political donations were made during the period under review.
STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT
The Directors recognise that communication with the Group’s employees is 
essential and the Group places importance on the contributions and views 
of its employees. Details of employee involvement are set out in the 
Responsibly Joules section of this Report and in the section 172(1) statement.
The section 172(1) statement, together with the Responsibly Joules section of 
this Report, also details how the Directors have engaged with shareholders, 
customers, partners and suppliers during the year to ensure that positive 
business relationships are nurtured. 
DISABLED EMPLOYEES
Details of the Group’s policy in relation to disabled employees is set out in 
the Responsibly Joules section of this Report.
STREAMLINED ENERGY AND CARBON REPORTING
Our streamlined energy and carbon reporting is set out in the Responsibly 
Joules section of this Report.
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO THE AUDITORS
Each of the persons who is a Director at the date of approval of this Report 
confirms that:
•	 so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of 
which the Company’s auditors are unaware; and
•	 the Director has taken all the steps that he/she ought to have taken as a 
Director in order to make himself/herself aware of any relevant audit 
information and to establish that the Company’s auditors are aware of 
that information.
AUDITOR
The auditor, Deloitte LLP, have indicated their willingness to continue in office 
and a resolution seeking to re-appoint them will be proposed at the AGM.
JONATHAN DARGIE
Company Secretary
DIRECTORS’ REPORT CONTINUED

75
Chapter 1
	 Chapter 2
Chapter 3
STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ 
RESPONSIBILITIES
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the 
financial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulations.
Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial statements for each 
financial year. Under that law the Directors are required to prepare the 
Group financial statements in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (‘IFRSs’) as adopted by the European Union and Article 
4 of the IAS Regulation and have elected to prepare the Parent Company 
financial statements in accordance with United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards and 
applicable law), including FRS 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’. Under 
company law the Directors must not approve the accounts unless they are 
satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the 
Company and of the profit or loss of the Company for that period.
In preparing the Parent Company financial statements, the Directors are 
required to:
•	 select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;
•	 make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable and 
prudent;
•	 state whether applicable UK Accounting Standards have been followed, 
subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the 
financial statements; and
•	 prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is 
inappropriate to presume that the Company will continue in business.
In preparing the Group financial statements, International Accounting 
Standard 1 requires that Directors:
•	 properly select and apply accounting policies;
•	 present information, including accounting policies, in a manner that 
provides relevant, reliable, comparable and understandable information;
•	 provide additional disclosures when compliance with the specific 
requirements in IFRSs are insufficient to enable users to understand the 
impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions on the 
entity’s financial position and financial performance; and
•	 make an assessment of the Company’s ability to continue as a going 
concern.
The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that 
are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s transactions and disclose 
with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company 
and enable them to ensure that the financial statements comply with the 
Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets 
of the Company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention 
and detection of fraud and other irregularities.
The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the 
corporate and financial information included on the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and 
dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other 
jurisdictions.
RESPONSIBILITY STATEMENT
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:
•	 the Financial Statements, prepared in accordance with the relevant 
financial reporting framework, give a true and fair view of the assets, 
liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole;
•	 the Strategic Report includes a fair review of the development and 
performance of the business and the position of the Company and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together 
with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face; 
and
•	 the Annual Report and Financial Statements, taken as a whole, are fair, 
balanced and understandable and provide the information necessary for 
shareholders to assess the Company’s position and performance, 
business model and strategy.
This responsibility statement was approved by the Board of Directors on 
2 August 2021 and is signed on its behalf by:
NICK JONES
Chief Executive Officer
STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES


Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL 
STATEMENTS
LET’S TAKE A CLOSER LOOK3

78
AUDITOR’S REPORT
REPORT ON THE AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
1.  OPINION
In our opinion:
•	 the financial statements of Joules Group plc (the ‘company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘group’) give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and 
of the company’s affairs as at 30 May 2021 and of the group’s profit for the period then ended;
•	 the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with international accounting standards in conformity with the 
requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as issued by the International Accounting 
Standards Board (IASB);
•	 the company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice, 
including Financial Reporting Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”; and
•	 the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
We have audited the financial statements which comprise:
•	 the consolidated income statement;
•	 the consolidated statement of comprehensive income;
•	 the consolidated and company statement of financial position;
•	 the consolidated and company statements of changes in equity;
•	 the consolidated cash flow statement; and
•	 the related notes 1 to 40.
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the group financial statements is applicable law and international accounting 
standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and IFRSs as issued by the IASB. The financial reporting framework that has been 
applied in the preparation of the company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, including FRS 101 “Reduced 
Disclosure Framework” (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).

2.  BASIS FOR OPINION
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under those 
standards are further described in the auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. 
We are independent of the group and the company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the 
UK, including the Financial Reporting Council’s (the ‘FRC’s’) Ethical Standard as applied to listed entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities 
in accordance with these requirements. 
We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

3.  SUMMARY OF OUR AUDIT APPROACH
KEY AUDIT MATTER
 
The key audit matter that we identified in the current period was:
•	 Store impairment 
MATERIALITY
The materiality that we used for the group financial statements was £0.5m. We have determined our materiality benchmark using 
a range of measures with consideration of financial performance and position, using revenue, net assets, and profit before tax.
SCOPING
In aggregate, our procedures have covered 99% of total revenue, 97% of total assets and 95% of total liabilities across the group.
SIGNIFICANT 
CHANGES IN OUR 
APPROACH
We previously determined that accuracy and completeness of the returns provision was a key audit matter due to the estimations 
used in the calculation. A new data-driven methodology was developed by the group for the period-ended 30 May 2021 and, 
along with the knowledge and understanding gained from auditing the returns provision in the prior period, we have concluded 
that the accuracy and completeness of the returns provision is no longer a key audit matter.
The acquisition made in the period has led to additional audit procedures being performed on the acquisition accounting and 
balances significant to the component. 
There has been no other significant change in component scoping with the group engagement team completing all work on 
components where required.
INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT
TO THE MEMBERS OF JOULES GROUP PLC

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 79
AUDITOR’S REPORT
4.  CONCLUSIONS RELATING TO GOING CONCERN
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial 
statements is appropriate.
Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the group’s and company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting included:
•	 Assessing financing facilities including nature of facilities, repayment terms and covenants;
•	 Challenging the assumptions used in the forecasts such as revenue growth by benchmarking against historical and market information;
•	 Evaluating the level of headroom in the forecasts (cash and covenants);
•	 Assessing the sensitivity analysis prepared by management including the effect of Covid-19 on the business and potential periods of store closures;
•	 Testing the model used to prepare the forecasts, testing of clerical accuracy of those forecasts and our assessment of the historical accuracy of forecasts 
prepared by management; and
•	 Evaluating the appropriateness of the going concern disclosures in the financial statements.
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may 
cast significant doubt on the group›s and company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the financial 
statements are authorised for issue.
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report.

5.  KEY AUDIT MATTERS
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements of the current period 
and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which 
had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team.
These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a 
separate opinion on these matters.
5.1.  STORE IMPAIRMENT
Key audit matter 
description
As at 30 May 2021 the group held £27.7m (2020: £20.5m) of property, plant and equipment and £28.3m (2020: £32.5m) 
of right of use assets, of which, on a combined basis, £22.9m (2020: £27.1m) related to stores. Impairment charges of £2.8m 
(2020: £15.2m) and reversal of previously recognised impairment charges of £0.8m (2020: nil) have been recognised within 
these values.
Under IAS 36 ‘Impairment of Assets’, the group is required to complete an impairment review of its store portfolio where there 
are indicators of impairment. At 30 May 2021, consistent with the prior year, the impact of Covid-19 on store performance 
has been identified as an impairment trigger.
As set out in note 4 to the financial statements, the group has estimated the recoverable amounts of store assets based on their 
value in use. The store impairment review involves management making several estimates to determine the value in use of 
each of the stores (being the net present value of the forecast cash flows). This is compared to the book value of that store’s 
assets, to identify whether any impairment or potential reversal of previously recognised impairment is required. In making this 
assessment, management determines each store to be a cash generating unit.
The key audit matter relates to the appropriateness of management’s estimate of future trading performance of the stores, 
which is used to derive the value in use. Value in use is calculated from cash flow projections and relies upon management’s 
assumptions and estimates of future trading performance, the recovery of stores from the period of lockdown and the revival 
of the UK economy, and the associated discount rates.
The initial impairment calculation for the period ended 30 May 2021 performed by management only included right of use 
assets, however this was subsequently amended to include associated PPE. The initial impairment model also had errors in 
relation to the WACC rate used, growth rates and no consideration of impairment reversals; these were corrected in 
management’s revised model.
The revised impairment model utilises the forecasts included in the Board’s base plan, which covers the periods up to May 
2024. As disclosed in note 1 to the financial statements, the model is sensitive to changes in forecast performance and 
growth rates, most notably sales and margin.

80
AUDITOR’S REPORT
How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter
Our audit procedures in relation to store impairment included:
•	 Obtaining an understanding of relevant controls around the impairment review process;
•	 Evaluating the reasonableness of management’s determination of a cash generating unit in the context of the definition 
under IAS 36;
•	 Testing the completeness of the assets included in the impairment review;
•	 Assessing the methodology applied in performing the revised impairment review with reference to the requirements of IAS 
36 ‘Impairment of Assets’;
•	 Evaluating management’s sensitivity analysis in relation to the key assumptions used in the cash flow forecasts; and
•	 Assessing the appropriateness of the group’s disclosures regarding the store impairment in the financial statements.
Specifically in relation to the risk associated with management’s estimate of future trading performance of the stores, our audit 
procedures included:
•	 Challenging the key assumptions utilised in the cash flow forecasts (including store sales and margins) with reference to 
the historical trading performance, market expectations, and our understanding of the group’s strategic initiatives;
•	 Assessing the growth rates and discount rates applied to the store cash flows, comparing the rates used to third party 
evidence with consideration of recovery from the Covid-19 UK lockdowns and benchmarking against our independently 
estimated discount rates;
•	 Challenging the consistency of management’s model with other areas of the financial statements in the current and 
previous periods, including going concern forecast; and
•	 Assessing the uplift in service potential of the assets where impairment reversals have been recorded.
Key observations
From the work performed, we concluded that the level of impairment charge and reversal of previously recognised 
impairment on the store estate is appropriate.

6.  OUR APPLICATION OF MATERIALITY
6.1.  MATERIALITY
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that makes it probable that the economic decisions of a reasonably 
knowledgeable person would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope of our audit work and in evaluating the results of our 
work.
Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:
GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Materiality
£0.5m (2020: £0.4m)
£0.3m (2020: £0.3m)
Basis for determining materiality
The materiality that we used for the group financial 
statements was £0.5m. We have determined our 
materiality benchmark using a range of measures 
with consideration of financial performance and 
position, using revenue, net assets, and profit before 
tax. This is consistent with the prior year. Materiality 
represents 0.25% of revenue, 0.38% of net assets 
and 25% of profit before tax. 
Company materiality equates to 3% of net assets, 
which is capped at 66% of group materiality. This is 
consistent with the prior year.
Rationale for the benchmark applied
Materiality is a professional judgement and we 
considered a number of different benchmarks used 
by investors and other users of the financial 
statements in determining this value.
The increase in materiality of 20% reflects the 
improved trading performance and position of the 
group.
Net assets has been used as the benchmark as the 
company operates primarily as a holding company 
for the group and we therefore consider this as the 
key metric for the Company.
We capped materiality at 66% of group materiality 
to reduce the risk of a material error arising as a 
result of the consolidation of the Company’s result in 
the group financial statements.

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 81
AUDITOR’S REPORT
6.2.  PERFORMANCE MATERIALITY
We set performance materiality at a level lower than materiality to reduce the probability that, in aggregate, uncorrected and undetected misstatements 
exceed the materiality for the financial statements as a whole.
GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Performance materiality
65% (2020: 70%) of group materiality
65% (2020: 70%) of company materiality
Basis and rationale for determining 
performance materiality
In determining performance materiality, we considered the following factors:
a.	 the quality of the control environment and not being able to rely on controls;
b.	 the level of corrected and uncorrected misstatements identified in the prior year audit; and
c.	 the change in key finance personnel.
6.3.  ERROR REPORTING THRESHOLD
We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit differences in excess of £25,000 (2020: £20,000), as well as 
differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to the Audit Committee on disclosure matters 
that we identified when assessing the overall presentation of the financial statements.

7.  AN OVERVIEW OF THE SCOPE OF OUR AUDIT
7.1.  IDENTIFICATION AND SCOPING OF COMPONENTS
The group’s main operations are within the UK with non-significant components in the US, Hong Kong, and China. As disclosed in note 2 of the Financial 
statements, on 9 February 2021 the Group acquired 100% of the issued share capital and obtained control of The Garden Trading Company Limited. Aside 
from this change, the group structure is consistent with the prior period and there are no significant sub-consolidations.
We have concluded that Joules Limited is the only financially significant component within the group. Joules Limited contributes 90% (2020: 90%) of the 
group’s total revenue and represents 61% (2020: 87%) of the group’s net assets before consolidation eliminations.
The US component and newly acquired component, The Garden Trading Company Ltd, have been subject to specified audit procedures on certain balances 
such as inventory, trade receivables and revenue in the current period. The US component contributes 9% (2019: 8%) of the group’s total revenue. The Garden 
Trading Company Ltd contributed 4% of the group’s total revenue. Other components were subject to review procedures on material balances.
In aggregate, our procedures have covered 99% of total revenue (2020: 99% of total revenue), 97% of total assets (2020: 98% of total assets) and 95% of 
total liabilities (2020: 96% of total liabilities) across the group.
The range of component materialities used were between £0.2m (2020: £0.1m) and £0.3m (2020: £0.3m), representing between 50-95% of group 
performance materiality. All the audit work was undertaken directly by the group engagement team and no component auditors were used.
At the group level we also tested all consolidation adjustments and carried out analytical procedures to confirm our conclusion that there were no significant 
risk of misstatement of the aggregated financial information of the remaining components not subject to audit or audit of specified balances.
7.2.  OUR CONSIDERATION OF THE CONTROL ENVIRONMENT
As part of our control environment understanding, we considered the key IT systems relevant to the audit. We have tested key IT systems including the group’s 
ERP, stock management system and point of sale interface.
We have not relied on key IT controls and have performed a fully substantive audit over all areas of the financial statements. We were also unable to rely on 
controls over business processes as we have not been able to obtain detailed evidence of the controls occurring in the period or found that the controls do not 
fully address our identified risks of material misstatement.

8.  OTHER INFORMATION
The other information comprises the information included in the annual report other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon. The directors 
are responsible for the other information contained within the annual report.
Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do not 
express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.
Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial 
statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of our audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.
If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives rise to a material misstatement 
in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we 
are required to report that fact.
We have nothing to report in this regard.

82
AUDITOR’S REPORT
9.  RESPONSIBILITIES OF DIRECTORS
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements and for being 
satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the company’s ability to continue as a going concern, 
disclosing as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the 
group or the company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

10.  AUDITOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR THE AUDIT OF THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to 
fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit 
conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are 
considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of 
these financial statements.
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. 
This description forms part of our auditor’s report.

11.  EXTENT TO WHICH THE AUDIT WAS CONSIDERED CAPABLE OF DETECTING IRREGULARITIES, INCLUDING FRAUD
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined 
above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, 
including fraud is detailed below.
11.1.  IDENTIFYING AND ASSESSING POTENTIAL RISKS RELATED TO IRREGULARITIES
In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including fraud and non-compliance with laws and regulations, we 
considered the following:
•	 the nature of the industry and sector, control environment and business performance including the design of the group’s remuneration policies, key drivers 
for directors’ remuneration, bonus levels and performance targets;
•	 results of our enquiries of management and the audit committee about their own identification and assessment of the risks of irregularities;
•	 any matters we identified having obtained and reviewed the group’s documentation of their policies and procedures relating to:
–	 identifying, evaluating and complying with laws and regulations and whether they were aware of any instances of non-compliance;
–	 detecting and responding to the risks of fraud and whether they have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud;
–	 the internal controls established to mitigate risks of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations;
•	 the matters discussed among the audit engagement team and relevant internal specialists, including tax, valuations, IT, and impairment specialists 
regarding how and where fraud might occur in the financial statements and any potential indicators of fraud.
As a result of these procedures, we considered the opportunities and incentives that may exist within the organisation for fraud and identified the greatest 
potential for fraud in the following areas; impairment of store assets and the returns provision. In common with all audits under ISAs (UK), we are also required 
to perform specific procedures to respond to the risk of management override.
We also obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks that the group operates in, focusing on provisions of those laws and regulations 
that had a direct effect on the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. The key laws and regulations we considered in 
this context included the UK Companies Act, Listing Rules, tax legislation and pension legislation.
In addition, we considered provisions of other laws and regulations that do not have a direct effect on the financial statements but compliance with which may 
be fundamental to the group’s ability to operate or to avoid a material penalty. These include employment law and health and safety regulations.
11.2.  AUDIT RESPONSE TO RISKS IDENTIFIED
As a result of performing the above, we identified store impairments as a key audit matter related to the potential risk of fraud. The key audit matters section of 
our report explains the matter in more detail and also describes the specific procedures we performed in response to that key audit matter.
In addition to the above, our procedures to respond to risks identified included the following:
•	 reviewing the financial statement disclosures and testing to supporting documentation to assess compliance with provisions of relevant laws and 
regulations described as having a direct effect on the financial statements;
•	 enquiring of management, the audit committee and legal counsel concerning actual and potential litigation and claims;
•	 performing analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships that may indicate risks of material misstatement due to fraud;

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 83
AUDITOR’S REPORT
•	 reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance, reviewing internal audit reports and reviewing correspondence with all relevant regulatory 
authorities;
•	 in addressing the risk of fraud through the returns provision, we tested the underlying data used within the model and assessed post year end returns to 
determine the appropriateness of the provision; and
•	 in addressing the risk of fraud through management override of controls, testing the appropriateness of journal entries and other adjustments; assessing 
whether the judgements made in making accounting estimates are indicative of a potential bias; and evaluating the business rationale of any significant 
transactions that are unusual or outside the normal course of business.
We also communicated relevant identified laws and regulations and potential fraud risks to all engagement team members including internal specialists and 
remained alert to any indications of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations throughout the audit.

REPORT ON OTHER LEGAL AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
12.  OPINIONS ON OTHER MATTERS PRESCRIBED BY THE COMPANIES ACT 2006
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:
•	 the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report for the financial period for which the financial statements are prepared is 
consistent with the financial statements; and
•	 the strategic report and the directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and the company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not 
identified any material misstatements in the strategic report or the directors’ report.
13.  MATTERS ON WHICH WE ARE REQUIRED TO REPORT BY EXCEPTION
13.1.  ADEQUACY OF EXPLANATIONS RECEIVED AND ACCOUNTING RECORDS
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:
•	 we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
•	 adequate accounting records have not been kept by the company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by 
us; or
•	 the company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.
We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.
13.2.  DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration have not been made.
We have nothing to report in respect of this matter.
14.  USE OF OUR REPORT
This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has 
been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other 
purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the company and the company’s members as 
a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.
KATE WAITE FCA (SENIOR STATUTORY AUDITOR)
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP
Statutory Auditor
St Albans
2 August 2021

84
CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT
JOULES GROUP PLC
NOTE
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
RESTATED
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
REVENUE
2
199,007
190,808
Cost of sales
7
(101,505)
(93,997)
GROSS PROFIT
97,502
96,811
Other administrative expenses
7
(88,126)
(99,273)
Share-based compensation
30
(1,653)
371
Exceptional administrative expenses
4
(4,162)
(20,950)
Total administrative expenses
(93,941)
(119,852)
OPERATING PROFIT/(LOSS)
3,561
(23,041)
Finance costs 
8
(1,583)
(1,774)
PROFIT/(LOSS) BEFORE TAX
1,978
(24,815)
Income tax (expense)/credit
9
(1,085)
4,539
PROFIT/(LOSS) FOR THE PERIOD
893
(20,276)
Basic earnings/(loss) per share (pence)
29
0.82
(21.61)
Diluted earnings/(loss) per share (pence)
29
0.81
(21.61)
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
JOULES GROUP PLC
NOTE
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
RESTATED
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
PROFIT/(LOSS) FOR THE PERIOD
893
(20,276)
Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:
Net loss arising on changes in fair value of hedging instruments entered into for cash flow hedges
23
(4,286)
(2,425)
Gains arising during the period on deferred tax on cash flow hedges
23
753
472 
Gains/(losses) arising during the period on deferred tax on share options
20
123
(177)
Net foreign exchange (loss)/gain on translation of foreign operations
23
(1,900)
732
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE (LOSS) FOR THE PERIOD
(4,417)
(21,674)
Note on prior year restatement: For further details of prior year balances, refer to Note 1– Significant Accounting Policies.

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 85
CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
JOULES GROUP PLC
NOTE
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
RESTATED
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
NON-CURRENT ASSETS 
Goodwill
13
5,531
–
Intangibles
11
25,566
20,507
Property, plant and equipment
10
27,737
20,547
Right-of-use assets
12
28,287
32,523
Derivative financial instruments
15
–
383
Deferred tax
20
908
3,034
TOTAL NON-CURRENT ASSETS
88,029
76,994
CURRENT ASSETS
Inventories
14
46,624
32,938
Right-of-return asset
14
925
2,364
Trade and other receivables
16
14,996
9,226
Current corporation tax receivable
–
2,099
Cash and cash equivalents
25
17,997
26,243
Derivative financial instruments
15
–
928
Asset held for sale
3
4,800
–
TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS
85,342
73,798
TOTAL ASSETS 
173,371
150,792
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Trade and other payables
17
58,750
31,678
Lease liabilities
12
9,360
11,047
Current corporation tax payable
520
–
Borrowings
19
6,196
12,924
Provisions
18
2,940
2,368
Right of return provision
18
2,026
5,129
Asset held for sale – lease liability
3
2,400
–
Derivative financial instruments
15
3,129
–
Other financial liabilities
3
5,646
–
TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES
90,967
63,146
NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Borrowings
19
7,724
8,780
Lease liabilities
12
30,451
35,635
Derivative financial instruments 
15
–
473
TOTAL NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES
38,175
44,888
TOTAL LIABILITIES
129,142
108,034
NET ASSETS
44,229
42,758
EQUITIES
Share capital
21
1,116
1,081
Hedging reserve
23
(2,804)
999
Translation reserve
23
(650)
1,250
EBT reserve
24
(769)
(769)
Merger reserve
22
(125,807)
(125,807)
Retained earnings
22
141,818
139,496
Share premium
22
26,508
26,508
Other reserve
3
4,817
–
TOTAL EQUITY
44,229
42,758
Note on prior year restatement: For further details of prior year balances, refer to Note 1- Significant Accounting Policies. 
These financial statements of Joules Group plc (Company Registration Number 10164829) were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue 
on 2 August 2021 and were signed on behalf of the Board of Directors by:
NICHOLAS JONES
Chief Executive Officer

86
CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
JOULES GROUP PLC
MERGER 
RESERVE 
£’000
OTHER 
RESERVE
£’000
HEDGING 
RESERVE 
£’000
TRANSLATION 
RESERVE 
£’000
EBT 
RESERVE 
£’000
SHARE 
CAPITAL 
£’000
SHARE 
PREMIUM 
£’000
RETAINED 
EARNINGS 
£’000
TOTAL 
EQUITY 
£’000
BALANCE AT 26 MAY 2019 
(125,807)
–
2,631
518
(322)
878
11,410
162,085
51,393
Loss for the period
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(20,276)
(20,276)
Other comprehensive income/(loss) 
for the period
–
–
(1,953)
732
–
–
–
(177)
(1,398)
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 
FOR THE PERIOD
–
–
(1,953)
732
–
–
–
(20,453)
(21,674)
Basis adjustment to hedged inventory
–
–
321
–
–
–
–
–
321
EBT share purchases and commitments
–
–
–
–
(1,171)
–
–
–
(1,171)
Share-based compensation options 
satisfied through the EBT reserve
–
–
–
–
724
–
–
(349)
375
Dividends issued (note 31)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(1,202)
(1,202)
Shares issued (note 21)
–
–
–
–
–
203
15,098
–
15,301
Debit to equity for equity-settled 
share-based compensation excl. NI 
(note 30)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(267)
(267)
Debit to equity for cash paid on 
net-settled withheld share-based 
compensation
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
(318)
(318)
RESTATED BALANCE AT 31 MAY 
2020 
(125,807)
–
999
1,250
(769)
1,081
26,508
139,496
42,758
Profit for the period
–
–
 –
 –
 –
 –
– 
893
893
Other comprehensive (expense) for 
the period
– 
–
(4,286)
(1,900)
– 
– 
– 
– 
(6,186)
Gains arising during the period on 
deferred tax on cash flow hedges
–
–
753
–
–
–
–
–
753
Gains arising during the period on 
deferred tax on share options
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
123
123
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE (LOSS) 
FOR THE PERIOD
–
–
(3,533)
(1,900)
–
–
–
1,016
(4,417)
On acquisition of subsidiary
–
4,817
–
–
–
–
–
–
4,817
Basis adjustment to hedged inventory
–
(270)
–
–
–
–
–
(270)
Shares issued (Note 21)
–
–
–
–
35
–
35
Credit to equity for equity-settled 
share-based compensation excl. NI 
(Note 30)
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
1,306
1,306
BALANCE AT 30 MAY 2021
(125,807)
4,817
(2,804)
(650)
(769)
1,116
26,508
141,818
44,229

Note: For further details on the restatement and prior year balances, refer to Note 1 – Significant Accounting Policies.

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 87
CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT
JOULES GROUP PLC
NOTE
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
RESTATED
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
CASH GENERATED FROM OPERATIONS
Profit/(Loss) for the period
893
(20,276)
Adjustments for:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
10
2,583
3,018
Depreciation of right–of use assets
12
7,995
12,645
Amortisation
11
5,432
3,803
Exceptional administrative expenses – impairment
4
2,896
20,446
Share–based compensation
30
1,653
(371)
Finance cost expense
8
1,583
1,774
Income tax expense/(credit)
9
1,085
(4,539)
OPERATING CASH FLOWS BEFORE MOVEMENTS IN WORKING CAPITAL
24,120
16,500
(Increase)/decrease in inventory and right of return asset
(10,065)
624
(Increase)/decrease in receivables
(3,708)
8,537
Increase/(decrease) in payables and right of return provision
18,078
(11,573)
CASH GENERATED BY OPERATIONS 
28,425
14,088
Bank interest paid
8
(340)
(366)
Interest paid on lease liabilities 
8
(1,243)
(1,408)
Tax refunded/(paid)
2,989
(931)
NET CASH FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES
29,831
11,383
Cash flow from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets
(13,562)
(13,686)
Acquisition of subsidiary
3
(4,156)
–
NET CASH FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES
(17,718)
(13,686)
Cash flow from financing activities
Purchase of EBT shares
–
(1,171)
Issue of shares
–
15,570
Capital element of lease repayments
12
(11,299)
(12,306)
Repayment of borrowings
26
(7,784)
(348)
Proceeds from borrowings
26
–
11,850
Dividend paid
31
–
(1,202)
NET CASH FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES
(19,083)
12,393
NET (DECREASE)/INCREASE IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
26
(6,970)
10,090
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
26,243
16,013
Effect of foreign exchange rate changes
(1,276)
140
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS AT END OF PERIOD
25
17,997
26,243

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
88
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
JOULES GROUP PLC
1. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES 
STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
The financial information has been prepared in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the 
European Union. The particular accounting policies adopted and applied 
are described below. 
The Group financial statements comprise the financial information of the 
parent undertaking and its subsidiary undertakings.
Joules Group plc is a public company limited by shares whose principal 
activities are the design and sale of lifestyle clothing, related accessories 
and a homeware range, through the multi-channel business structure 
including retail stores, e-commerce, country shows and events and 
wholesale. The company’s registered office is The Joules Barn, Rockingham 
Road, Market Harborough, Leicestershire, LE16 7QD.
For the year ended 30 May 2021 the following subsidiaries of the 
Company were entitled to exemption from audit under s479A of the 
Companies Act 2006 relating to subsidiary companies.
Subsidiary Name
COMPANIES 
HOUSE 
REGISTRATION 
NUMBER
Joules Investments Holdings Limited
08752970
Joules Limited
02934327
Joules Developments Limited
11250107
Joules Property Limited
11250113
The Garden Trading Company Limited
02854160
APPLICATION OF NEW AND REVISED INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL 
REPORTING STANDARDS (IFRSS)
Adoption of new and revised standards
There have been no new IFRSs adopted in the current year which have 
materially impacted the Group’s financial statements.
New accounting standards, amendments and interpretations in 
issue but not yet effective
There are several standards and interpretations issued by the IASB that are 
effective for financial statements after this reporting period. Of these new 
standards, amendments and interpretations, there are none which are 
expected to have a material impact on the Group’s consolidated financial 
statements.
BASIS OF PREPARATION
The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis, 
except for certain financial assets and liabilities that are measured at fair 
value at the end of each reporting period, as explained in the accounting 
policies below.
For financial reporting purposes, fair value measurements are categorised 
into Level 1, 2 or 3 based on the degree to which the inputs to the fair value 
measurements are observable and the significance of the inputs to the fair 
value measurement, which are described as follows:
•	 Level 1 inputs are quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for 
identical assets or liabilities that the entity can access at the measurement 
date;
•	 Level 2 inputs are inputs, other than quoted prices included within Level 
1, that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly; 
and
•	 Level 3 inputs are unobservable inputs for the asset or liability.
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with International 
Financial Reporting Standards requires the use of estimates and assumptions 
that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of 
contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and 
the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reported period. 
Although these estimates are based on management’s best knowledge of 
current events and actions, actual results ultimately may differ from those 
estimates.
The principal accounting policies adopted are set out below.
BASIS OF CONSOLIDATION
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of 
the Company and its subsidiaries. Control is achieved when the Company:
•	 has power over the investee;
•	 is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the 
investee; and
•	 has the ability to use its power to affect its returns.
The Company reassesses whether or not it controls an investee if facts and 
circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more of the three 
elements of control listed above.
The Company considers all relevant facts and circumstances in assessing 
whether or not the Company’s voting rights in an investee are sufficient to 
give it power over the entity.
Consolidation of a subsidiary begins when the Company obtains control 
over the subsidiary and ceases when the Company loses control of the 
subsidiary. 
When necessary, adjustments are made to the financial statements of 
subsidiaries to bring their accounting policies into line with the Group’s 
accounting policies.
All intragroup assets and liabilities, equity, income, expenses and cash flows 
relating to transactions between members of the Group are eliminated in full 
on consolidation. Intragroup balances are repayable on demand.
RESTATEMENT OF PRIOR PERIOD BALANCES
An adjustment has been made to the prior periods’ Income Statement and 
Statement of Financial Position to exceptional administrative expenses, 
right-of-use assets and related tax balances in relation to the treatment of 
prior year impairment considerations due to inconsistency between the prior 
period impairment model and the IFRS 16 assumption on the term of the 
lease. The effect on specific financial statement line items within the 
Consolidated Income Statement and Consolidated Statement of Financial 
Position is as follows:
Consolidated Income Statement:
31-MAY-20
REPORTED 
£’000
ADJUSTMENT
£’000
RESTATED
£’000
Exceptional administrative 
expenses
(21,480)
530
20,950
Income tax credit/
(expense)
4,640
(101)
4,539
(Loss) for the period
(20,705)
429
(20,276)

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 89
1. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position:
31-MAY-20
REPORTED 
£’000
ADJUSTMENT 
£’000
RESTATED 
£’000
Right-of-use assets
31,993
530
32,523
Deferred tax asset
3,135
(101)
3,034
Retained Earnings
139,067
429
139,496
 
GOING CONCERN
As for many businesses in the retail sector, the Group has been significantly 
impacted by COVID-19. The impact and management’s initial response is 
set out in detail within the CEO’s report and the Financial Review.
Despite the easing of the UK’s lockdown and the re-opening of non-
essential retail in mid-April 2021, the retail sector continues to face 
significant uncertainties, including short-term and potentially more 
fundamental long-term changes in consumer behaviour as well as the 
potential for ongoing operational disruption. Given these uncertainties, the 
Directors have undertaken a comprehensive assessment to consider the 
going concern and longer-term viability of the Group and Company. In 
making their assessment the Directors have considered the following:
•	 The Group’s financial position, as at the date of this report, and its 
committed borrowing facilities available for the time period under 
consideration 
•	 The support from the Group’s shareholders and bank, including the 
successful equity placing that was completed in the early stages of the 
UK lockdown during the prior period and the financing facility extension 
that was completed in April 2021 
•	 Alternative sources of financing, including sale & leaseback of freehold 
property and asset financing that might reasonably be assumed to be 
available to the Group – noting that any financing from these sources 
has not been included within the forecasts that support the going concern 
assessment 
•	 Financial commitments, including capital commitments, lease 
commitments, stock purchases and other non-variable/non-discretionary 
costs. In respect of property leases, the Directors note the relatively short 
lease commitments, of less than three years on average, that the Group 
has across its store portfolio together with recent and on-going progress 
on renewing leases on favourable terms 
•	 The extent of potential Government support initiatives including business 
rates relief and the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) 
•	 Strength of brand, reflected in active customer growth, brand awareness 
and brand health metrics – as detailed more fully in the Strategic Review 
•	 The flexibility and agility of the Group’s business model, as described in 
the Strategic Review, noting that over two thirds of the Group’s retail 
sales are via e-commerce and that the Group has diversified sources of 
revenue, operating across several channels and geographic markets, 
with owned and third-party channels including wholesale and 
marketplaces. Newer income streams of brand licensing and the Group’s 
Friends of Joules digital marketplace and from Garden Trading following 
the acquisition in February 2021 provide additional comfort on the 
strength of the brand and diversity of income channels 
The Directors have also considered the trading performance of the Group’s 
stores as they have re-opened following the easing of the UK’s lockdown 
restrictions on 12 April 2021, as well as the performance of the Group’s 
e-commerce channel, which has continued to exceed management’s 
expectations during the Period. 
The Directors have reviewed management’s business plan forecasts that 
cover the period to 26 May 2024, being the Group’s strategic plan horizon. 
The forecasts have been produced on the following basis: 
•	 Base plan – a gradual sales recovery post the end of the UK’s third 
lockdown in April 2021, continuing the trend experienced since the UK’s 
lockdown restrictions were eased in mid-April 2021, reflecting 
management’s estimates for the speed and extent of recovery across its 
different sales channels and markets. It reflects stores being open 
throughout the period under review initially trading significantly below 
the comparative pre-COVID-19 period, improving to approximately 
80% of pre-COVID-19 sales levels by the end of FY22, with modest 
growth thereafter. Third-party wholesale channels are assumed to follow 
a similar trajectory. The Group’s e-commerce sales are forecast to grow 
at double-digit levels reflecting performance over recent years and 
experienced during the UK’s latest lockdown in January to March 2021. 
•	 Downside scenario – the ‘Base plan’ adjusted to reflect a further UK 
lockdown for three months during October to December 2021 with all 
non-essential retail closed during the Group’s key trading period, 
followed by a much slower recovery of the Group’s stores channel with 
total store revenues only achieving approximately 60% of the pre-
COVID-19 levels by the end of FY24. Ecommerce sales growth is 
assumed to be at half of the ‘Base plan’ levels and wholesale sales are 
assumed to reduce significantly during FY22 compared to the ‘Base 
plan’. 
Within each forecast, management have reflected financial commitments 
and the impact of realised or anticipated cost savings from discretionary and 
variable costs. No Government support or subsidies, other than those 
announced and committed at the date of this report, are included. 
The Directors have also stress tested the forecast to consider situations under 
which the Company would have insufficient liquidity under its current 
secured borrowing facilities and/or it would not meet its banking covenant 
tests. One such ‘Stress test scenario’ is that of an even further extended 
potential COVID-19 related lockdown in the UK for up to six months, with a 
material disruption to retail store operations during the full peak Autumn/
Winter 2021 trading season resulting in significantly reduced store channel 
revenue and lower receipts from the Group’s Wholesale channels. The 
Stress test scenario assumes e-commerce revenue growth in line with the 
‘Downside scenario’ noting that loyal customers would no longer be able to 
access the brand via the store environment – as demonstrated during the 
previous UK lockdowns, plus ongoing income from Garden Trading, brand 
licensing and digital marketplace activities. The Stress test scenario assumes 
that the Group would only reduce directly related variable sales costs during 
the period and does not assume any further cost mitigation actions which 
would be available to the Group. No additional Government support or 
subsidies to offset costs or support cash flow are assumed in this scenario. 
The Directors believe, with reference to the considerations noted above, that, 
firstly the likelihood of this situation arising in its most extreme form is remote 
and, secondly, that they anticipate that the Group would be able to adapt 
and respond to mitigate the impacts and continue to trade and meet its 
obligations through the period of consideration. 
The Base plan and Downside scenario forecasts indicate that the Group will 
remain within its available committed borrowing facilities and in compliance 
with covenants throughout the forthcoming 12-month period. Under the 
Downside scenario, the Group has more than £20 million available liquidity 
headroom through-out the period under consideration and has EBITDA 
headroom of £2.7 million against its May 2022 year end covenant test and 
headroom of £5.6 million at its first covenant test in the period at the end of 
November 2021. 
The Group would also remain within its borrowing facilities and comply with 
covenants under the Stress test through this period. 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
90
1. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
Following consideration of these forecasts and having made appropriate 
enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company 
has adequate resources to continue in operational existence until at least 12 
months after the approval of the Financial Statements. Therefore, the 
Directors continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in 
preparing the Consolidated Financial Statements. 
SALE OF GOODS AND REVENUE RECOGNITION
The Group’s contracts with customers for the sale of products generally 
includes one performance obligation being the delivery of the goods. The 
Group has concluded that revenue from the sale of product, including 
products sold through concessions, should be recognised at the point in time 
when control of the asset is transferred to the customer i.e. on the delivery of 
the product. Concession revenues are settled net of commissions or other 
fees payable. Revenue from the sale of products and concession revenue is 
reported within the Retail segment in Note 5.
Wholesale revenues from the sale of goods are recognised at the point the 
control of the inventory has passed to the customer, which depends on the 
specific terms of the sales transaction and which is typically on delivery. 
Wholesale revenues are reported within the Wholesale segment in Note 5.
Royalties on licensed products are recognised on a straight-line basis as 
license income over the period of the invoice, which is typically invoiced 
quarterly. Any additional royalties due are accrued as earned based on 
sales statements received from product license partners, to reflect delivery of 
the product. Royalties revenue is reported within the Other segment in Note 
5.
Net commission received from digital marketplace sales is recognised in one 
performance obligation being the provision of payment services. The group 
considers itself an agent in these transactions. The group has concluded that 
the revenue should be recognised at the point the performance obligation 
has been met. Commission is reported within the Other segment in Note 5.
Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or 
expected to be receivable. Revenue is recorded excluding Value Added Tax 
and is reduced for actual and estimated customer returns, discounts, rebates 
and other similar allowances.
OPERATING PROFIT
Operating profit is presented in the Consolidated Income Statement as a 
“non-GAAP measure” of performance, and is calculated as profit before 
finance charges and taxation. There have been no changes to this definition 
from the prior period.
RETURNS PROVISION
Present obligations for the actual and estimated customer returns are 
recognised and measured as provisions when it is probable that the Group 
will be required to settle the obligation under sales contracts. Returns 
provisions in existence at the statement of financial position date are 
expected to be utilised within 12 months. The provision is recalculated at 
each statement of financial position date taking into account recent sales 
and anticipated levels of returns. The standard returns policy for Joules 
products is 28 days or 14 days depending on the product type. At the 
period end returns are not expected to have a material impact on revenue 
recognised in the financial statements.
BORROWING COSTS
Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or 
production of qualifying assets, which are assets that necessarily take a 
substantial period of time to get ready for their intended use or sale, are 
added to the cost of those assets, until such time as the assets are 
substantially ready for their intended use or sale.
To the extent that variable rate borrowings are used to finance a qualifying 
asset and are hedged in an effective cash flow hedge of interest rate risk, 
the effective portion of the derivative is recognised in other comprehensive 
income and reclassified to profit or loss when the qualifying asset impacts 
profit or loss. To the extent that fixed-rate borrowings are used to finance a 
qualifying asset and are hedged in an effective fair value hedge of interest 
rate risk, the capitalised borrowing costs reflect the hedged interest rate.
Investment income earned on the temporary investment of specific 
borrowings pending their expenditure on qualifying assets is deducted from 
the borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation. All other borrowing costs are 
recognised in profit or loss in the period in which they are incurred.
GOVERNMENT GRANTS
Government grants are not recognised until there is reasonable assurance 
that the Group will comply with the conditions attached to them and that the 
grants will be received.
Government grants are recognised in the Income Statement on a systematic 
basis over the periods in which the Group recognises expenses and related 
costs for which the grants are intended to compensate, within administrative 
expenses.
BUSINESS COMBINATIONS
Acquisitions of subsidiaries are accounted for using the acquisition method. 
The consideration transferred in a business combination is measured at fair 
value, which is calculated as the sum of the acquisition-date fair values of 
assets transferred by the Group, liabilities incurred by the Group to the 
former owners of the acquiree and the equity interest issued by the Group in 
exchange for control of the acquiree. Acquisition-related costs are 
recognised in profit or loss as incurred.
At the acquisition date, the identifiable assets acquired and the liabilities 
assumed are recognised at their fair value at the acquisition date, except 
that:
•	 Deferred tax assets or liabilities and assets or liabilities related to 
employee benefit arrangements are recognised and measured in 
accordance with IAS 12 and IAS 19 respectively.
Goodwill is measured as the excess of the sum of the consideration 
transferred over the net of the acquisition-date amounts of the identifiable 
assets acquired and the liabilities assumed. 
The consideration transferred by the Group when acquiring The Garden 
Trading Company Limited includes a contingent consideration arrangement. 
The contingent consideration is measured at its acquisition-date fair value 
and is included as part of the consideration transferred. Changes in the fair 
value of the contingent consideration that qualify as measurement period 
adjustments will be adjusted retrospectively, with corresponding adjustments 
against goodwill. The ‘measurement period’ will not exceed one year from 
the acquisition date and will be based on facts and circumstances that 
existed at the acquisition date.
Contingent consideration that is classified as equity is not remeasured at 
subsequent reporting dates and its subsequent settlement is accounted for 
within equity. Other contingent consideration is remeasured to fair value at 
subsequent reporting dates with changes in fair value recognised in profit 
or loss.
GOODWILL
Goodwill is initially recognised and measured as set out above.
The value of goodwill recognised on acquisition is not amortised, however 
management will review for impairment at least annually. For the purpose of 
impairment testing, goodwill is allocated to each of the Group’s cash-
generating units expected to benefit from the synergies of the acquisition. 
Cash-generating units to which goodwill has been allocated are tested for 
impairment annually, or more frequently when there is an indication that the 
unit may be impaired.

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 91
1. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
If the recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit is less than the carrying 
amount of the unit, an impairment loss is allocated first to reduce the carrying 
amount of any goodwill allocated to the unit and then to the other assets of 
the unit pro-rata on the basis of the carrying amount of each asset in the unit. 
PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Land and buildings held for use in the production or supply of goods or for 
administrative purposes, are stated in the Statement of Financial Position at 
their fair value, being the deemed cost at the date of acquisition, less any 
subsequent accumulated depreciation and subsequent accumulated 
impairment losses. Assets in the course of construction for production, supply 
or administrative purposes, are carried at cost, less any recognised 
impairment loss. Depreciation of these assets commences when the assets 
are ready for their intended use.
Depreciation is provided at the following annual rates in order to write off 
each asset over its estimated useful life or, if held under a finance lease term, 
whichever is the shorter.
Land and Buildings – Buildings straight line over 25 years, Land non-
depreciating
Fixtures and fittings – straight line over 3-5 years
Motor vehicles – straight line over 4 years
INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Trademarks and other intangibles
Trademarks and other intangibles are measured initially at purchase cost 
and are amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives. 
The balances disclosed in Note 11 relate to items such as registered 
trademarks, logos and domain names. 
IT systems
Software and IT represent computer systems and processes used by the 
Group in order to generate future economic value through normal business 
operations. The underlying assets are amortised over the period from which 
the Group expects to benefit, which is typically between three to eight years. 
Intangible assets acquired separately
Intangible assets with finite useful lives that are acquired separately are 
carried at cost less accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment 
losses. Amortisation is recognised on a straight-line basis over their 
estimated useful lives. The estimated useful life and amortisation method are 
reviewed at the end of each reporting period, with the effect of any changes 
in estimate being accounted for on a prospective basis. 
Research and development expenditure
Expenditure on research activities is recognised as an expense in the period 
in which it is incurred.
Internally-generated intangible assets
An internally-generated intangible asset arising from development (or from 
the development phase of an internal project) is recognised if, and only if, all 
of the following have been demonstrated:
•	 the technical feasibility of completing the intangible asset so that it will be 
available for use or sale;
•	 the intention to complete the intangible asset and use or sell it;
•	 the ability to use or sell the intangible asset;
•	 how the intangible asset will generate probable future economic 
benefits;
•	 the availability of adequate technical, financial and other resources to 
complete the development and to use or sell the intangible asset; and
•	 the ability to measure reliably the expenditure attributable to the 
intangible asset during its development.
The amount initially recognised for internally-generated intangible assets is 
the sum of the expenditure incurred from the date when the intangible asset 
first meets the recognition criteria listed above. Where no internally-
generated intangible asset can be recognised, development expenditure is 
recognised in profit or loss in the period in which it is incurred.
Subsequent to initial recognition, internally-generated intangible assets are 
reported at cost less accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment 
losses.
Intangible assets acquired in a business combination
Intangible assets acquired in a business combination and recognised 
separately from goodwill are recognised initially at fair value at the 
acquisition date (which is regarded as their cost). 
Subsequent to initial recognition, intangible assets acquired in a business 
combination are reported at cost less accumulated amortisation and 
accumulated impairment losses, on the same basis as intangible assets that 
are acquired separately. Intangible assets acquired on the acquisition of The 
Garden Trading Company Limited include a tradename (useful life of 15 
years) and customer relationships (useful life of 10 years).
Derecognition of intangible assets
An intangible asset is derecognised on disposal, or when no future 
economic benefits are expected from use or disposal.
Gains or losses arising from the derecognition of an intangible asset, 
measured as the difference between the net disposal proceeds and the 
carrying amount of the asset are recognised in profit or loss when the asset is 
derecognised.
IMPAIRMENT OF TANGIBLE AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS
At each Statement of Financial Position date, the Group reviews the carrying 
amounts of its tangible and intangible assets to determine whether there is 
any indication that those assets have suffered an impairment loss. If any such 
indication exists, the recoverable amount of the asset is estimated in order to 
determine the extent of the impairment loss (if any). Where it is not possible 
to estimate the recoverable amount of an individual asset, the Group 
estimates the recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit to which the 
asset belongs.
Recoverable amount is the higher of fair value less costs to sell and value in 
use. In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash flows are discounted 
to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market 
assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset.
If the recoverable amount of an asset (or cash-generating unit) is estimated 
to be less than its carrying amount, the carrying amount of the asset 
(cash-generating unit) is reduced to its recoverable amount. An impairment 
loss is recognised immediately in profit or loss. Where an impairment loss 
subsequently reverses, the carrying amount of the asset (or cash-generating 
unit) is increased to the revised estimate of its recoverable amount, but so 
that the increased carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount 
that would have been determined had no impairment loss been recognised 
for the asset (or cash-generating unit) in prior years. A reversal of an 
impairment loss is recognised immediately in profit or loss to the extent that it 
eliminates the impairment loss which has been recognised for the asset in 
prior years. 
LEASES 
The Group leases its stores and offices where it operates, with the exception 
of the new head office development of which the Group owns the freehold 
land and building development. Other lease contracts include office 
equipment and motor vehicles.
On entering into a contract, the Group assesses whether a contract is a 
lease based on whether the contract conveys the right to control the use of 
an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration.

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
92
1. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability on the lease 
commencement date. The right-of-use asset is initially measured based on 
the initial amount of the lease liability, adjusting for any lease payments 
made on or before the commencement date, plus any initial direct costs 
incurred, less any lease incentives received. The assets are depreciated over 
the full lease term using the straight-line method. Right-of-use assets are 
reviewed for indicators of impairment. 
The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease 
payments that are outstanding at the commencement date, discounted using 
the interest rate implicit in the lease, or if that rate cannot be readily 
determined, the Group’s incremental borrowing rate for the same term as the 
underlying lease. Lease payments included in the measurement of the 
liability contain fixed payments, break fees where appropriate, less any 
lease incentives receivable as at the commencement date. Lease 
modifications result in a remeasurement of the lease liability.
Depreciation is recognised under administrative expenses and the interest 
expense is recognised under finance costs in the Consolidated Income 
Statement.
The Group has elected to use the exemption not to recognise the right-of-use 
assets and lease liabilities for short-term leases that have a lease term of 12 
months or less, and for leases where the total value of minimum lease 
payments is below £5,000. The payments associated with these leases are 
recognised as administrative expenses on a straight-line basis over the lease 
term, the total amount expensed in the period amounted to £505,000. The 
Group has not applied the practical expedient in relation to COVID-19 rent 
concessions, modifications to lease arrangements during the period are 
shown in Note 12.
INVENTORIES
Inventory is carried in the financial statements at the lower of cost and net 
realisable value. Cost includes product purchase price and associated 
inward transportation costs. Net realisable value is based on estimated 
selling price less further costs incurred to disposal.
TAXATION
Income tax credit/expense represents the sum of the tax currently 
receivable/payable and deferred tax.
CURRENT TAX
The tax currently receivable/payable is based on taxable profit for the year. 
Taxable profit differs from net profit reported in the Income Statement 
because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or 
deductible in other years and items that are never taxable or deductible.
The Group’s current tax is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted 
or substantively enacted by the statement of financial position date.
DEFERRED TAX
Deferred tax is recognised on temporary differences between the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and the 
corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit. 
Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary 
differences and deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is 
probable that taxable profits will be available against which deductible 
temporary differences can be utilised. 
Deferred tax liabilities and assets are measured at the tax rates that are 
expected to apply in the period in which the liability is settled or the asset 
realised, based on tax rates and tax laws enacted by the end of the 
reporting period.
The measurement of deferred tax liabilities and assets reflects the tax 
consequences that would follow from the manner in which the Group 
expects, at the end of the reporting period, to recover or settle the carrying 
amount of its assets and liabilities.
CURRENT AND DEFERRED TAX FOR THE YEAR
Current and deferred tax are recognised in profit or loss, except when they 
relate to items that are recognised in other comprehensive income or directly 
in equity, in which case, the current and deferred tax are also recognised in 
other comprehensive income or directly in equity respectively. 
FOREIGN CURRENCIES
Transactions entered into by the Group entities in a currency other than the 
currency of the primary economic environment in which they operate (their 
“functional currency”) are recorded at the rates ruling when the transaction 
occurs. Foreign currency monetary assets and liabilities are translated at the 
rates ruling at the reporting date. Exchange differences arising on the 
retranslation of unsettled monetary assets and liabilities are recognised 
immediately in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income. The 
assets and liabilities of overseas subsidiaries denominated in a foreign 
currency, including fair value adjustments arising on consolidation, are 
translated at foreign exchange rates ruling at the statement of financial 
position date. The revenues and expenses of overseas subsidiaries are 
translated into sterling using average foreign exchange rates ruling at the 
date of transaction. Foreign exchange differences arising on retranslation 
are recognised in the retranslation reserve in equity.
PENSIONS
The Group operates a defined contribution pension scheme. Contributions 
payable for the period are recognised as an expense when employees have 
rendered service entitling them to the contributions.
PROVISIONS 
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation (legal or 
constructive) as a result of a past event, it is probable that the Group will be 
required to settle the obligation and a reliable estimate can be made of the 
amount of the obligation, net of any third-party recoveries that can be 
measured reliably.
The amount recognised as a provision is the best estimate of the 
consideration required to settle the present obligation at the end of the 
reporting period, taking into account the risks and uncertainties surrounding 
the obligation. 
LEASE DILAPIDATION
The Group recognises obligations arising from lease contracts where it is 
required to restore leased properties to their pre-lease condition upon the 
expiry of leases. In line with IFRS 16, each lease dilapidation provision is 
capitalised within the right-of-use asset of each lease and depreciated over 
the life of the lease where any dilapidation costs could be reasonably 
estimated at the commencement date.
FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised when a group entity 
becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instruments.
Financial assets and financial liabilities are initially measured at fair value. 
Transaction costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition or issue of 
financial assets and financial liabilities are added to or deducted from the 
fair value of the financial assets or financial liabilities, as appropriate, on 
initial recognition.

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 93
1. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
FINANCIAL ASSETS
Loans and receivables
Trade and other receivables originated by the Company are stated at 
amortised cost as reduced by appropriate allowances for doubtful debts 
using the Expected Credit Loss model, as detailed in Note 16 ‘Trade and 
other receivables’. 
Trade and other receivables that have fixed or determinable payments that 
are not quoted in an active market are classified as ‘Trade and other 
receivables’. They are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest 
method, less any impairment. Interest income is recognised by applying the 
effective interest rate, except for short-term receivables when the recognition 
of interest would be immaterial.
Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents are measured at transaction cost, based on the 
relevant exchange rates at the statement of financial position date and 
include overdrafts where these are used on a day-to-day basis to manage 
cash.
Other financial liabilities 
Other financial liabilities, including loans payable, are initially measured at 
fair value, net of transaction costs. Other financial liabilities are subsequently 
measured at amortised cost.
Loans payable
Interest-bearing loans are initially recorded on the day that the loans are 
advanced at the net proceeds received.
At subsequent reporting dates, interest-bearing borrowings are measured at 
amortised cost. Finance charges, including premiums payable on settlement 
or redemption and direct issue costs, are accounted for on the accrual basis 
in the Statement of Comprehensive Income using the effective interest rate 
method and are added to the carrying amount of the instrument to the extent 
that they are not settled in the period in which they arise.
Trade payables
Trade payables are stated at amortised cost.
Derivative financial instruments and cash flow hedges
The Group holds derivative financial instruments to hedge its foreign 
currency exposure to US dollar (USD), particularly in relation to the purchase 
of inventory, to protect against the risk of fluctuation in USD exchange rates 
and the impact on margin this could have. These derivatives, classified as 
cash flow hedges, are initially recognised at fair value and then re-measured 
at fair value at the end of each reporting date. Hedging relationships are 
documented at inception and the effectiveness in offsetting changes in cash 
flows is tested throughout their duration. Changes in the value of cash flow 
hedges are recognised in other comprehensive income and any ineffective 
portion is immediately recognised in the Income Statement. If the firm 
commitment or forecast transaction that is the subject of a cash flow hedge 
results in the recognition of a non-financial asset or liability, then at the time 
the asset is recognised, the associated gains or losses on the derivative that 
had been previously recognised on other comprehensive income are 
included in the initial measurement of the asset or liability (reclassified to the 
balance sheet). For hedges that do not result in the recognition of an asset or 
liability, amounts deferred in other comprehensive income are recognised in 
the Statement of Comprehensive Income in the same period in which the 
hedged item affects net profit.
Share-based compensation
Equity-settled share-based compensation transactions with parties other 
than employees are measured at the fair value of the goods or services 
received, except where that fair value cannot be estimated reliably, in which 
case they are measured at the fair value of the equity instruments granted, 
measured at the date the entity obtains the goods or the counterparty 
renders the service. On cancellation of an award, a charge is recognised in 
the Consolidated Income Statement which is based on management’s 
estimate of how many instruments are expected to vest at the original future 
vesting date, on the date of cancellation.
The fair value determined at the grant date of the equity-settled share-based 
compensation is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period, 
based on the Group’s estimate of equity instruments that will eventually vest. 
At each Statement of Financial Position date, the Group revises its estimate of 
the number of equity instruments expected to vest as a result of the effect of 
non-market-based vesting conditions. The impact of the revision of the 
original estimates, if any, is recognised in profit or loss such that the 
cumulative expense reflects the revised estimate, with a corresponding 
adjustment to equity reserves.
Shares held by EBT
During the year ended 26 May 2019, Joules Group plc set up an Employee 
Benefit Trust (“EBT”) to provide for the issue of shares to Group employees, 
principally under share option schemes. Shares in the Company held by the 
EBT are included in the Balance Sheet at cost, including any directly 
attributable incremental costs, as a deduction from equity.
Exceptional administrative expenses 
Exceptional administrative expenses are those that, in management’s 
judgement, should be disclosed by virtue of their nature or amount. 
Exceptional administrative expenses will typically include material items that 
are significant in nature, which are expected to be non-recurring and are 
important to users in understanding the business. 
CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND KEY SOURCES OF 
ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY
Drawing up the financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires 
management to make the necessary estimates and assessments. Estimates 
are based on past experience and other reasonable assessment criteria. 
However, actual results may differ from these estimates and assessments will 
bring about an adjustment in the value of the assets and liabilities in the next 
financial year. The Directors do not consider there to be any critical 
accounting judgements present.
In accordance with IAS 1 the Group is required to disclose critical 
accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty. The 
Directors do not consider there to be any material critical accounting 
judgements, and have identified the following key estimates below:
RETURNS PROVISION – RATE OF RETURN
In preparing the financial statements the Directors have made estimates with 
regard to the variable consideration element within product sales as a result 
of returns. The Directors have used their accumulated historical knowledge 
of returns to model the level of provision required and have also taken into 
account the extension of the returns policy and the impact for the period that 
stores were closed. 
The rate of returns expected in relation to e-commerce sales is considered to 
be a source of estimation uncertainty. Sensitivity analysis has been carried 
out on the rate of return used at the period end using a reasonable change 
in rate:
An increase/decrease of 3% in the expected rate of return for e-commerce 
sales would increase/decrease the returns provision by £320,000.
IMPAIRMENT TESTING – REVENUE GROWTH AND MARGIN 
ASSUMPTIONS
The value in use of CGUs in relation to stores have been calculated based 
on discounted cash flow forecasts using internal store profitability models, 
which have been forecasted for the next three years. If a store’s break date/
lease end date is within more than three years, the assumption has been 
taken to use Year 3 forecasts, with no growth rates assumed, which will also 
be discounted further using the WACC rate of 14%. The key assumptions in 
the value in use calculations are considered to be revenue growth rates and 
gross profit margins.

94
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
1. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES CONTINUED
IMPAIRMENT TESTING – VALUE IN USE CALCULATIONS
Value in use calculations
A key estimate in relation to the impairment charge and impairment reversal recognised for right-of use assets, and property plant and equipment, is the value 
in use for each separate cash-generating unit (“CGU”). Each CGU comprises the right-of use asset for each store, as well as any fixtures and fittings 
associated with each store. As at 30 May 2021 the group held £25.6 million (2020: £20.5 million) of property, plant and equipment and £28.3 million 
(2020: £32.5 million) of right of use assets, of which, on a combined basis, £22.9 million (2020: £27.1 million) related to stores. Impairment charges of £2.8 
million (2020: £15.8 million) and reversal of previously recognised impairment charges of £0.8 million (2020: nil) have been recognised within these values. 
The value in use is calculated from expected future cash flows based on the most recent financial forecasts approved by management (see going concern 
disclosures in Note 1 for further information). These forecasts are discounted at a pre-tax rate that reflects management’s current assessment of the time value 
of money. Future cash flows include an apportionment of relevant head office costs, and only include direct revenues from store sales. The forecast is prepared 
on a ‘top down’ basis and has been attributed to individual stores based on their historical performance relative to the rest of the store estate and store type. 
Cashflows generated by eCommerce are within a separate CGU.
The discount rate used for the value in use calculation, together with the forecast revenue and gross margin, are considered to be the key sources of estimation 
uncertainty. Sensitivity analysis has been carried out on the impairment calculations using reasonably possible changes in assumptions, including a change to 
the discount rates, and changes to the revenue and gross margin assumptions in the base financial plan.
KEY ASSUMPTION
REASONABLY POSSIBLE CHANGE
IMPACT ON 
IMPAIRMENT 
CHARGE
INCREASE/
(DECREASE)
£’000
IMPACT ON 
IMPAIRMENT 
REVERSAL
DECREASE/ 
(INCREASE)
£’000
Discount rate
Increase of 3% (from 14% to 17%)
407
238
Discount rate
Decrease of 3% (from 14% to 11%)
(319)
(270)
Gross Margin
2% reduction in gross profit margin from year 1 onwards
655
304
Gross Margin
2% increase in gross profit margin from year 1 onwards
(499)
(377)
Revenue growth
Reduction in growth of 3% in year one of the three-year plan.*
645
297
Revenue growth
Increase in growth of 3% in year one of the three-year plan.*
(483)
(368)
*	
This impacts subsequent year’s cashflow forecast which are calculated using year 1 revenues as a base
In combination, a reduction in revenue growth of 3% in year one of the three-year plan* and an increase of 3% in the discount rate (from 14% to 17%) would 
increase the impairment charge by £1,220,000 and reduce the reversal by £543,000.
In combination, a reduction in revenue growth of 3% in year one of the three-year plan* and 2% reduction in gross margin from year 1 onward would increase 
impairment charge by £1,566,000 and reduce the impairment reversal by £608,000.
Further reasonably possible changes of the other assumptions, including reducing the long-term growth rate to 0% across all stores, would not result in a 
material increase to the impairment charge, either individually or in combination.
2. REVENUE
The Group derives its revenue from customers for the transfer of goods at a point in time in the following segment. The disclosure of revenue by product line is 
consistent with the revenue information that is disclosed for each reportable segment under IFRS 8 (see Note 5).
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Retail
158,588
145,898
Wholesale
35,305
42,668
Other
5,114
2,242
199,007
190,808

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 95
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
3. ACQUISITION OF A SUBSIDIARY (PROVISIONAL)
On 9 February 2021, the Group acquired 100% of the issued share capital and obtained control of The Garden Trading Company Limited. The Garden 
Trading Company Limited is a digitally focused retailer of home and garden products and qualifies as a business as defined in IFRS 3. The Garden Trading 
Company Limited was acquired to support the Group’s strategy to grow its customer base, broaden its product offer and strengthen its digital platform.
The amounts in respect of the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed are set out in the table below.
£’000
Financial assets
8,575
Inventory
1,997
Property, plant and equipment
371
Identifiable intangible assets
6,662
Financial liabilities
(5,121)
Deferred tax liabilities
(1,590)
Total identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed
10,854
Goodwill
5,531
TOTAL CONSIDERATION
16.385
Satisfied by:
Cash
5,860
Equity instrument (2,828,535 ordinary shares of Joules Group plc)
4,879
Contingent consideration arrangement
5,646
TOTAL CONSIDERATION TRANSFERRED
16,385
Net cash outflow arising on acquisition:
Cash consideration paid to date
5,489
Less: cash and cash equivalent balances acquired
(1,333)
4,156
 
The potential undiscounted amount of all future payments that the Group could be required to make in respect of this contingent liability is estimated to be 
between £nil and £5.7million. Due to the contingent consideration being due within one year, the impact of discounting is considered to be insignificant.
The goodwill of £5.5million arising from the acquisition consists of savings from acquiring an existing workforce, as well as technology and contract related 
costs. None of the goodwill is expected to be deductible for income tax purposes.
The fair value of the 2,828,535 ordinary shares issued as part of the consideration paid for The Garden Trading Company Limited of £4.9million was 
determined on the basis of multiplying the number of shares issued by the share price at the acquisition date.
The contingent consideration arrangement consists of two elements. The first element requires two earn-out targets to be met, and the second element is 
contingent on the sale of a property. The potential undiscounted amount of all future payments that Joules Group plc could be required to make under the 
contingent consideration arrangement is between £nil and £5.7million.
Financial assets acquired includes £4.8million recognised in respect of a property acquired as part of the acquisition, which meets the criteria of an asset held 
for sale under IFRS 5. A lease liability of £2.4million has also been recognised which is included within the financial liabilities above.
Acquisition-related costs (included in exceptional administrative expenses) amount to £0.6million. 

The Garden Trading Company Limited contributed £8.7million to revenue and £1.8million to the Group’s profit for the period between the date of acquisition 
and the reporting date. If the acquisition of The Garden Trading Company Limited had been completed on the first day of the financial year, Group revenues 
for the year would have been £212.3 million and Group profit before tax and exceptional administrative expenses would have been £8.2 million.

96
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
4. EXCEPTIONAL ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES
The exceptional administrative expenses recognised in the period relate to right-of use assets, property plant and equipment, and intangible assets which are 
impaired, as well as other costs associated with the acquisition of The Garden Trading Company Limited and restructuring costs across the Group. The total 
charge recognised in the period can be categorised as follows:
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
RESTATED
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Impairment of assets relating to stores
1,989
15,222
Impairment of other fixed assets
907
5,224
Acquisition costs
589 
–
Restructuring costs
677
504
4,162 
20,950
STORE IMPAIRMENTS
Retail stores are subject to impairment based on whether current or future events and conditions suggest that their recoverable amount may be less than their 
carrying value.
The recoverable amount of each store is based on the higher of the value in use and fair value less costs to dispose. As all of the Group’s retail stores are 
leasehold, only the value in use has been considered in each impairment assessment. Value in use is calculated from expected future cash flows using suitable 
discount rates, management assumptions and estimates on future performance. The carrying value for each store is considered net of the carrying value of any 
cash contribution received in relation to that store.
For impairment testing purposes, the Group has determined that each store is a separate CGU. Each CGU is tested for impairment if any indicators of 
impairment have been identified. 
The value in use of each CGU is calculated based on the Group’s latest budget and forecast cash flows. Cash flows are discounted using the weighted 
average cost of capital (“WACC”) of 14% and are modelled for each store through to their lease expiry or break date. No lease extensions have been 
assumed when forecasting.
As a result of this assessment an impairment charge of £2,624,000 (2020: £12,614,000) and reversals of £840,000 (2020: £nil) were recognised in the 
period against the right-of-use asset for the stores which are impaired. The impairment charge relates to 31 separate CGUs (2020: 79) and impairment 
reversals relate to 13 stores (2020: nil). The stores with impairment reversals were written back to their recoverable amount. An impairment charge of 
£205,000 (2020: £2,608,000) has also been recognised in relation to fixtures and fittings associated with these stores.
FIXED ASSETS
An in-depth review of other fixed assets has also been performed as part of the ‘Joules Blueprint’ strategy to identify any which are not fit for purpose with new 
strategic pillars established.
This has resulted in an impairment charge of £591,000 (2020: £141,000) relating to intangible fixed assets that are impaired, and £316,000 (2020: 
£1,510,000) relating to property, plant and equipment. 
ACQUISITION COSTS
During the Period one-off charges of £589,000 were incurred relating to acquisition costs of The Garden Trading Company Limited. Further details on the 
acquisition are within Note 3.

RESTRUCTURING COSTS
During the Period total amounts recognised of £677,000 (2020: £504,000) related to group restructuring costs. The restructuring costs related to a 
re-organisation of structures across the Group’s head office functions which commenced in FY20 and was completed in the Period as part of the ‘Joules 
Blueprint’ business strategy to review organisational design and introduce clarity around roles and responsibilities.


Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 97
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
5. SEGMENT REPORTING
The Group has three reportable segments; Retail, Wholesale and Other. For each of the three segments, the Group’s chief operating decision-maker (the 
“Board”) reviews internal management reports on a monthly basis. Each segment can be summarised as follows:
•	 Retail: Retail includes sales and costs relevant to stores, e-commerce, shows and franchises.
•	 Wholesale: Wholesale includes sales and costs relevant to the sale of products to other retail businesses or distributors for onward sale to their customers.
•	 Other: Other includes income from licensing and the ‘Friends of Joules’ digital marketplace, central costs and items that are not distinguishable into the 
segments above.
The accounting policies of the reportable segments are the same as described in Note 1. Information regarding the results of each reportable segment is 
included below. Operating results being earnings before exceptional administrative expenses, share-based compensation, interest and taxation are used to 
measure performance as management believes that such information is the most relevant in evaluating the performance of certain segments relative to other 
entities that operate within these industries. Performance of The Garden Trading Company Limited has been allocated appropriately within the Retail and 
Wholesale segments.
All income and expenses are allocated to reportable segments with the exception of share-based compensation, exceptional administrative expenses and 
finance costs. There are no discontinued operations in the period.
52 WEEKS ENDED 30 MAY 2021
RETAIL
£’000
WHOLESALE
£’000
OTHER
£’000
TOTAL
£’000
REVENUE
158,588
35,305
5,114
199,007
Cost of sales
(75,656)
(25,849)
–
(101,505)
GROSS PROFIT
82,932
9,456
5,114
97,502
Administration expenses
(38,371)
(9,319)
(24,426)
(72,116)
Depreciation and amortisation
(9,033)
(276)
(6,701)
(16,010)
OPERATING RESULT
35,528
(139)
(26,013)
9,376
Costs unallocated to segments:
Share-based compensation (incl. NI)
(1,653)
Exceptional administrative expenses
(4,162)
Finance costs
(1,583)
PROFIT BEFORE TAX
1,978
RESTATED 53 WEEKS ENDED 31 MAY 2020
RETAIL
£’000
WHOLESALE
£’000
OTHER
£’000
TOTAL
£’000
Revenue
145,898
42,668 
2,242
190,808
Cost of sales
(62,880)
(31,117)
– 
(93,997)
GROSS PROFIT
83,018
11,551
2,242
96,811
Administration expenses
(42,423)
(12,219)
(25,165)
(79,807)
Depreciation and amortisation
(13,964)
(773)
(4,729)
(19,466)
OPERATING RESULT
26,631
(1,441)
(27,652)
(2,462)
Costs unallocated to segments:
Share-based compensation (incl. NI)
371
Exceptional administrative expenses
(20,950)
Finance costs
(1,774)
LOSS BEFORE TAX
(24,815)

98
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
5. SEGMENT REPORTING CONTINUED
GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION
The Group’s revenue from external customers and non-current assets by geographical location is as detailed below.
UK
£’000
INTERNATIONAL
£’000
TOTAL
£’000 
52 weeks ended 30 May 2021
Revenue
174,000
25,007
199,007
Non-current assets
87,128
901
88,029
53 weeks ended 31 May 2020
Revenue
161,307
29,501
190,808
Non-current assets
75,983
1,011
76,994
6. INFORMATION REGARDING DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Staff costs during the period
Wages and salaries
27,490
31,546
Social security costs
2,343
3,002
Other pension costs
688
763
Equity-settled share-based compensation charges
1,653
(371)
32,174
34,940
Staff costs above are net of amounts received in respect of government job retention scheme grants totalling £4.6 million (2020: £2.4million).
NUMBER
NUMBER
The average number of employees (including Executive Directors) was:
Head office
551
573
Stores and Shows
1,139
1,235
Warehousing
–
128
1,690
1,936
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION
The tables below detail the total remuneration earned by each Executive Director:
52 WEEKS ENDED 
30 MAY 2021
SALARIES/FEES 
£’000²
TAXABLE 
BENEFITS 
£’000
PENSION 
£’000
ANNUAL 
BONUS 
(INCLUDING 
DEFERRED 
BONUS) 
£’000
LTIP 
£’000
ONE-OFF 
AWARDS 
£’000
TOTAL 
REMUNERATION 
£’000
Executive Directors
T S L Joule
170.9
10.8
8.5
–
–
–
190.2
N Jones
420.0
17.3
12.6
–
–
–
449.9
M S Dench¹
270.3
20.5
13.5
–
–
_
304.3
Non-Executive Directors
I F Filby
100.0
–
–
–
–
–
100.0
J C Little
41.7
–
–
–
–
–
41.7
D A Stead
45.8
–
–
–
–
–
45.8
TOTAL
1,048.7
48.6
34.6
–
–
–
1,131.9

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 99
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
6. INFORMATION REGARDING DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES CONTINUED
53 WEEKS ENDED 
31 MAY 2020
SALARIES/
FEES
£’000²
TAXABLE 
BENEFITS 
£’000
PENSION 
£’000
ANNUAL 
BONUS 
(INCLUDING 
DEFERRED 
BONUS) 
£’000
LTIP 
£’000
ONE-OFF 
AWARDS 
£’000⁵
TOTAL 
REMUNERATION 
£’000³
Executive Directors
T S L Joule
284.8
21.0
17.1
–
–
–
322.9
C N Porter₄
146.6
12.6
7.3
–
–
–
166.5
N Jones₄
294.0
12.6
9.5
–
–
223.1
539.2
M S Dench¹
256.8
16.7
12.8
–
–
33.8
320.1
Non-Executive Directors
I F Filby
120.0
–
–
–
–
–
120.0
J C Little
50.0
–
–
–
–
–
50.0
D A Stead
45.8
–
–
–
–
–
45.8
TOTAL
1,198.0
62.9
46.7
–
–
256.9
1,564.5
1	
Marc Dench resigned as CFO and as an employee of Joules with effect from 11 May 2021.
2	
Nick Jones and Marc Dench waived the payment of a proportion of their salary for the last 2 months of FY20 and the first 2 months of FY21. It has subsequently been agreed that salary waived by Nick 
and Marc in FY21 will be repaid. The Non-Executive Directors deferred or waived the payment of a proportion of their fees for the last 2 months of FY20 and the first 2 months of FY21. The figures above 
represent the total figure payable in respect of the financial year (including any deferred sums). 
 3	
Once the value of the waived awards in lieu of salary (referred to at footnote 5 below) have been deducted, the total remuneration for FY20 for Nick Jones and Marc Dench was £487k and £286k 
respectively.
 4	
Colin Porter retired as CEO, and Nick Jones was appointed as CEO, with effect from 30 September 2019. Nick Jones’ remuneration in the table above reflects his remuneration from 2 September 2019, 
the date on which he joined the Company. Colin Porter’s remuneration in the table above reflects his remuneration to his last day of employment with the Company, which was 31 October 2019.
 5	
The one-off awards reflect one-off share awards granted in FY20. For Marc Dench this was an award in respect of salary waived during the year. For Nick Jones, this includes his buyout award and an 
award in respect of salary waived during FY20. In response to shareholder feedback, during FY21 Nick Jones and Marc Dench both agreed to waive the awards in lieu of salary.
The number of directors to whom retirement benefits have accrued during the period was 3 (2020: 3).
7. PROFIT FOR THE YEAR
Profit before tax is stated after charging/(crediting):
 
52 WEEKS
ENDED
30 MAY 2021
£’000
53 WEEKS
ENDED
31 MAY 2020
£’000
Cost of inventories recognised as expense
83,223
79,850
Write down of inventory in the period
1,556
682
Transportation, carriage and packaging
14,597
11,499
Property rent and service charges*
1,133
792
Government business rates relief
(2,251)
(815)
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
2,583
3,018
Depreciation of Right-of-use assets
7,995
12,645
Amortisation of intangible assets 
5,432
3,803
Staff costs (see Note 6)
30,522
35,311
Share-based compensation
1,653
(371)
Exceptional administrative expenses (see Note 4) 
4,162
20,950

100 NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
7. PROFIT FOR THE YEAR CONTINUED
AUDITOR’S REMUNERATION
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
The analysis of auditor’s remuneration is as follows:
Audit of these financial statements 
225
141
TOTAL AUDIT FEES
225
141
Other services pursuant to legislation:
Tax advice
–
8
Audit related assurance services
–
5
Remuneration and share plan advisory
6
20
TOTAL NON–AUDIT FEES
6
33

NON-AUDIT SERVICES
The general policy in respect of non-audit work by the external auditors is that they should not be requested to carry out a prohibited non-audit service as 
defined under provision 5.120–5.127 of the Financial Reporting Council’s Ethical Standard and/or non-audit services on any material activity of the Group 
where they may, in the future, be required to give an audit opinion or act as management, in accordance with the Audit Practices Board’s Ethical Standard for 
Auditors.
In certain limited areas, it is in the Group’s and its shareholders’ interests to engage the external audit firm to deliver certain services. 
To protect auditor objectivity and independence management approves each individual non-audit service. The level of non-audit fees are monitored to 
ensure they do not exceed 70% of the average annual statutory audit fees payable annually.
8. FINANCE COSTS
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Credit facility interest
146
258
Term loan interest
194
108
Lease liability interest
1,243
1,408
TOTAL
1,583
1,774
9. INCOME TAX
a) Analysis of charge in the period
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
RESTATED
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Current tax
UK corporation tax based on the profit/loss for the period 
–
(3,029) 
Adjustment in respect of prior periods
(365)
(5)
Overseas tax
37
275
TOTAL CURRENT TAX (CREDIT)
(328)
(2,759)
Deferred taxation (Note 20)
Origination and reversal of temporary differences
608
(1,333)
Deferred tax on share–based compensation
596
(251)
Effect of adjustment in tax rate
209
(196)
TOTAL DEFERRED TAXATION CHARGE/(CREDIT)
1,413
(1,780)
TAX CHARGE/(CREDIT) FOR THE PERIOD (NOTE 9B)
1,085
(4,539)

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 101
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
9. INCOME TAX CONTINUED
In addition to the amount charged to the income statement, the following amounts relating to tax have been recognised in other comprehensive income.
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Deferred taxation (Note 20)
(Loss) arising during the period on deferred tax on cash flow hedges
(753)
(472)
Deferred tax on unexercised share options
(123)
177
TOTAL INCOME TAX (LOSS) RECOGNISED IN OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
(876)
(295)
b) Factors affecting the tax charge for the period
There are reconciling items between the expected tax charge and the actual which are shown below:
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
RESTATED
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
PROFIT/(LOSS) BEFORE TAXATION
1,978
(24,815)
UK corporation tax at the standard rate 
19.0%
19.0%
Profit multiplied by the standard rate in the UK
376
(4,715)
Effects of:
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes and other permanent differences
134
725
Adjustments in respect of prior period
231
(3,285)
Difference in overseas tax rate
9
21
Effect of adjustment in deferred tax rate
212
(196)
Share-based compensation
123
(300)
Losses carried back
–
3,160
R&D expenditure credits
–
33
IFRS 16 practical expedient on transition adjustment
–
18
TAX EXPENSE/(CREDIT) FOR THE PERIOD (NOTE 9A)
1,085
(4,539)
The current tax credit in the prior period includes a reversal of the prior year corporation tax charge for the 52 weeks ended 26 May 2019, following a carry 
back of tax losses generated for the 53 weeks ended 31 May 2020.
An increase in the UK corporation rate from 19% to 25% (effective 1 April 2023) was substantively enacted on 24 May 2021. This will increase the 
company’s future current tax charge accordingly. The deferred tax asset at 30 May 2021 has been calculated based on these rates, reflecting the expected 
timing of reversal of the related temporary differences (2020: 19%).

102 NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
10. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
LAND & 
BUILDINGS 
£’000
FIXTURES AND 
FITTINGS 
£’000
MOTOR 
VEHICLES 
£’000
TOTAL 
£’000
COST
At 26 May 2019
7,391 
29,450 
59 
36,900
Additions
7,280 
3,095 
63 
10,438
At 31 May 2020
14,671
32,545
122
47,338
Additions
6,887
3,149
–
10,036
Exchange differences
–
(113)
–
(113)
Acquisition of subsidiary
203
168
–
371
At 30 May 2021
21,761
35,749
122
57,632
ACCUMULATED DEPRECIATION
At 26 May 2019
–
19,596
59
19,655
Charge for the period
–
2,980 
38 
3,018 
Impairment
–
4,118
–
4,118
At 31 May 2020
–
26,694 
97 
26,791 
Charge for the period
16
2,560
7
2,583
Impairment
–
521
–
521
At 30 May 2021
16
29,775
104
29,895
NET BOOK VALUE
At 26 May 2019
7,391 
9,854 
– 
17,245 
At 31 May 2020
14,671
5,851
25
20,547
At 30 May 2021
21,745
5,974
18
27,737
PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Land & buildings comprise of land, buildings and capitalised borrowing costs in relation to the ongoing development of the site intended for use as the 
Group’s new head office, which is under construction and is therefore not being depreciated. The amount of borrowing costs capitalised in the year amounted 
to £112,000 (2020: £112,000). The amount of expenditure recognised in the carrying amount of land and buildings above in relation to the new head office 
whilst in the course of its construction is £20,813,000 (2020: £13,996,000). Completion of the new head office for the Group took place in June 2021.
During the Period, the Group carried out a review of the recoverable amount of property, plant and equipment. The review led to the recognition of an 
impairment loss of £521,000 (2020: £4,118,000), which was recognised within exceptional administrative expenses in the Consolidated Income Statement. 

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 103
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
11. INTANGIBLE ASSETS (EXCLUDING GOODWILL)
TRADEMARKS 
AND OTHER 
INTANGIBLES 
£’000
IT SYSTEMS 
£’000
TOTAL 
£’000
COST
At 26 May 2019
1,178
23,442
24,620
Additions
81
7,508
7,589
At 31 May 2020
1,259
30,950
32,209
Additions
44
4,395
4,439
Acquired on acquisition of subsidiary
6,622
21
6,643
At 30 May 2021
7,925
35,366
43,291
ACCUMULATED AMORTISATION
At 26 May 2019
397
7,361
7,758
Charge for the period
124
3,679
3,803
Impairment
–
141
141
At 31 May 2020
521
11,181
11,702
Charge for the period
256
5,176
5,432
Impairment
–
591
591
At 30 May 2021
777
16,948
17,725
NET BOOK VALUE
At 26 May 2019
781
16,081
16,862
At 31 May 2020
738
19,769
20,507
At 30 May 2021
7,148
18,418
25,566
INTANGIBLE ASSETS
During the year, the Group carried out a review of intangible assets as part of the ‘Joules Blueprint’ strategy to identify any which are not fit for purpose with 
new strategic pillars established. The review led to the recognition of an impairment loss of £591,000 (2020: £141,000), which was recognised within 
exceptional administrative expenses, under impairment of other fixed assets, in the Consolidated Income Statement. 

104 NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
12. LEASES
Right-of-use assets:
LAND AND 
BUILDINGS
£’000
FIXTURES AND 
FITTINGS
£’000
MOTOR 
VEHICLES
£’000
IT EQUIPMENT
£’000
TOTAL
£’000
Balance as at 27 May 2019
57,465
199
356
646
58,666
Additions
1,381
–
131
–
1,512
Disposals
(533)
–
–
–
(533)
Impairment
(16,187)
–
–
–
(16,187)
Modifications
1,710
–
–
–
1,710
Depreciation of Right-of-use assets
(11,976)
(97)
(249)
(323)
(12,645)
Restated Balance as at 31 May 2020
31,860
102
238
323
32,523
Additions
4,122
–
–
142
4,264
Impairment
(1,784)
–
–
–
(1,784)
Modifications
1,279
–
–
–
1,279
Depreciation of Right–of–use assets
(7,438)
(81)
(139)
(337)
(7,995)
Balance as at 30 May 2021
28,039
21
99
128
28,287
Lease liabilities:
LAND AND 
BUILDINGS
£’000
FIXTURES AND 
FITTINGS
£’000
MOTOR 
VEHICLES
£’000
IT EQUIPMENT
£’000
TOTAL
£’000
Balance as at 27 May 2019
55,176
199
356
646
56,377
Additions
1,292
–
130
–
1,422
Disposals
(521)
–
–
–
(521)
Modifications
1,376
3
16
13
1,408
Interest expense related to lease liabilities
1,710
–
–
–
1,710
Repayment of lease liabilities (including interest)
(13,020)
(94)
(265)
(335)
(13,714)
Balance as at 31 May 2020
46,013
108
237
324
46,682
Additions
3,630
–
–
142
3,772
Disposals
(265)
–
–
–
(265)
Interest expense related to lease liabilities
1,221
3
5
14
1,243
Modifications
921
–
–
–
921
Repayment of lease liabilities (including interest)
(11,964)
(27)
(203)
(348)
(12,542)
Balance as at 30 May 2021
39,556
84
39
132
39,811
An impairment charge of £2,624,000 (2020: £16,187,000) and reversals of £840,000 (2020: £nil) were recognised in the period against the right-of-use 
assets which are impaired (see Note 4 for further details). 

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 105
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
13. GOODWILL
TOTAL 
£’000
COST
At 31 May 2020
–
Recognised on acquisition of subsidiary (see Note 3)
5,531
At 30 May 2021
5,531
Accumulated impairment loss
At 31 May 2020
–
Impairment losses for the year
–
At 30 May 2021
–
CARRYING AMOUNT
At 31 May 2020
–
At 30 May 2021
5,531
14. INVENTORIES
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Goods for resale
31,409
29,475
Goods in transit 
15,215
3,463
46,624
32,938
The cost of inventories recognised as an expense during the year in respect of continuing operations in the 52 weeks ended 30 May 2021 was £83,223,000 
(2020: £80,489,000). The cost of inventories recognised as an expense includes £1,556,000 for the 52 weeks ended 30 May 2021 (2020: £682,000) in 
respect of write-downs of inventory to net realisable value. Inventories are stated after provisions for impairment of £1,853,000 (2020: £941,000).
Product is purchased on a seasonal basis with the intention of selling it within 12 months of the purchase date. Any aged stock is appropriately provided for.
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Right of return asset
925
2,364
925
2,364
The right of return asset represents the Group’s right to recover products from customers where customers exercise their right of return. The Group uses its 
accumulated historical experience to estimate the number of returns using the expected value method.

106 NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
15. DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
FORWARD CONTRACTS AND OPTIONS
The Group enters into forward foreign exchange contracts and options to manage the risk associated with anticipated sale and purchase transactions which 
are denominated in foreign currencies. 
As at 30 May 2021, the Group had 93 (2020: 78) forward foreign exchange contracts outstanding. Derivative financial instruments are carried at fair value, 
further detailed on Note 27.
The following table details the USD foreign currency contracts outstanding as at the balance sheet date.
OUTSTANDING CONTRACTS
AVERAGE 
EXCHANGE RATE
FOREIGN CURRENCY
NOTIONAL VALUE
FAIR VALUE
2021
£/$
2020
£/$
2021
$’000
2020
$’000
2021
£’000
2020
£’000
2021
£’000
2020
£’000
Buy US Dollars
Less than 3 months
1.338
1.245
30,000
21,809
22,422
17,876
(1,279)
129
3 to 6 months
1.342
1.229
18,000
26,309
13,411
21,782
(724)
(129)
6 months and above
1.370
1.282
45,000
28,809
32,844
22,801
(1,126)
838
1.350
1.254
93,000
76,927
68,677
62,459
(3,129)
838
The Company does not hold Euro to GBP forward options (2020: nil). The US Dollar spot rate at 30 May 2021 was $1.4173/£1.
The fair value of cash flow hedges of the Group as at 30 May 2021 was an asset of £nil (2020: £1,311,000) and a liability of £3,129,000 (2020: 
£473,000) resulting in a net liability of £3,129,000 (2020: £838,000), further detailed in Note 27.
The ineffective component of the cash flow hedge is insignificant and therefore the entire value of the continuing hedges at the year-end is recognised within 
the cash flow hedge reserve. 
16. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
30 MAY 2021
£’000
31 MAY 2020
£’000
Trade receivables – gross
9,889
5,913 
Less: allowance for expected credit losses (calculated under IFRS 9)
(350)
(940)
Trade receivables – net
9,539
4,973 
Other receivables
1,117
1,359 
Prepayments
4,340
2,894 
TOTAL TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
14,996
9,226
All of the Other receivables and Prepayment balances above are deemed to be current and do not include impaired assets. Amounts within prepayments do 
not include payments made over one year in advance. The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date is the carrying value of each class of asset. 
The Group has no significant concentration of credit risk, with exposure spread over a large number of counterparties and customers. Accordingly, the 
Directors believe that there is no further credit provision risk required in excess of the allowance for doubtful debts. 
Trade receivables balances relate to balances owed by wholesale customers at the Period end where the standard credit period on sales of goods is 30 
days. Interest may be charged on outstanding trade receivables. The Group measures the loss allowance for trade receivables at an amount equal to lifetime 
ECL. The expected credit losses on trade receivables are estimated using a provision matrix by reference to past default experience of the debtor and an 
analysis of the debtor’s current financial position, adjusted for factors that are specific to the debtor, general economic conditions of the industry in which the 
debtors operate and an assessment of both the current as well as the forecast direction of trading conditions at the reporting date. All trade receivable 
balances are assessed individually.
The Group writes off a trade receivable when there is information indicating that the debtor is in severe financial difficulty and there is no realistic prospect of 
recovery, e.g. when the debtor has been placed under liquidation or has entered into bankruptcy proceedings, or when the trade receivables are over two 
years past due, whichever occurs earlier. None of the trade receivables that have been written off are subject to enforcement activities.

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 107
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
16. TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES CONTINUED
The following table details the risk profile of trade receivables based on the Group’s provision matrix. As the Group’s historical credit loss experience does not 
show significantly different loss patterns for different customer segments, the provision for loss allowance based on past due status is not further distinguished 
between the Group’s different customer base:
30 MAY 2021
NOT PAST DUE
£000
<30
£000
31-60
£000
>61
£000
TOTAL
£000
Expected credit loss rate
0%
3%
23%
36%
4%
Gross carrying amount
7,925
1,061
225
678
9,889
Loss allowance
(21)
(32)
(51)
(246)
(350)
NET TRADE RECEIVABLES
7,904
1,029
174
432
9,539
As at the date of the approval of these financial statements a total of £6,439,000 has been received in relation to the above trade receivables as follows: 
£5,146,000 not past due, £948,000 <30 days past due, £157,000 31-60 days past due and £188,000 and >61 days past due.
31 MAY 2020
NOT PAST DUE
£000
<30
£000
31-60
£000
>61
£000
TOTAL
£000
Expected credit loss
0%
12%
16%
51%
15%
Gross carrying amount
2,440
675
1,615
1,183
5,913
Loss allowance
–
(82)
(260)
(598)
(940)
NET TRADE RECEIVABLES
2,440
593
1,355
585
4,973
Movement in expected credit losses
2021
£’000
2020
£’000
Balance at beginning of period under IFRS 9
(940)
(325)
Movement in loss allowance recognised in profit or loss during the year
(262)
(921)
Receivables written off during the year as uncollectable
47
143
Amounts recovered
805
163
BALANCE AT END OF PERIOD
(350)
(940)
The table above details the movement in the lifetime expected credit losses that have been recognised for trade and other receivables in accordance with the 
simplified approach set out in IFRS 9.
17. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Trade payables
25,505
14,777
Other taxation and social security
5,883
2,989
Deferred income
1,309
1,431
Other payables
579
1,353
Accruals 
25,474
11,128
58,750
31,678
Trade and other payables principally comprise amounts outstanding for trade purchases and ongoing costs. The Directors consider that the fair value of trade 
and other payables is not materially different from the carrying value.

108 NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
17. TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES CONTINUED
GIFT CARD LIABILITY
Gift cards constitute a contractual liability and therefore require a disclosure of the value of the outstanding liability at the end of the period and the amount 
recognised during the period for performance obligations met. The below amounts are included within deferred income above:
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Opening balance
1,431
1,108
New issues
2,287
4,013
Redeemed
(2,409)
(3,690)
CLOSING BALANCE
1,309
1,431
It is expected that largely all of the revenue deferred during the period will be recognised within two years.
18. PROVISIONS
Dilapidations provision at the period end is as follows: 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Balance brought forward
2,368
247
Additional provision during the period
604
2,121
Utilisation of provision
(32) 
–
BALANCE AT END OF PERIOD
2,940
2,368
Dilapidation costs are estimated at the commencement date of each lease. For retail stores, the dilapidations provision is calculated using an average cost per 
store based on the most recent dilapidation costs incurred from stores exited, whereas estimated dilapidation costs for other non-retail leases are based on 
management’s accumulated historical knowledge of buildings of similar size and purpose. The provision is expected to be utilised within three years.
The right of return provision at the period end is as follows:
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Balance brought forward
5,129
1,548
Additional provision during the period
1,607
5,129
Utilisation of provision
(4,710)
(1,548)
BALANCE AT END OF PERIOD
2,026
5,129
The right of return provision relates to the customer’s right to return products following purchase. At the point of sale, a refund liability and a corresponding 
adjustment to revenue is recognised for those products expected to be returned. The Group uses its accumulated historical experience to estimate the number 
of returns using the expected value method. The provision is expected to be utilised within one year.

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 109
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
19. BORROWINGS 
SUMMARY OF BORROWING ARRANGEMENTS
The Credit facility relates to one Revolving Credit Facility with Barclays Bank PLC that totals £25.0 million, in which amounts drawn down are generally 
repayable within three months. In April 2020 an extension to the facility of £15 million was provided by Barclays Bank PLC for a 12-month period, this expired 
in April 2021. 
In April 2021 the remaining £25 million facility was renegotiated with Barclays Bank PLC and as a result the term was extended out from July 2022 and now 
matures in September 2024. As part of the April 2021 renegotiation of the RCF, the Group entered into a new financing agreement which links the margin on 
the facility with Joules’ performance against three Sustainability Performance Targets (SPTs) that are aligned with Joules’ ESG focus areas. Under the terms of 
the agreement, Joules will benefit from a lower interest rate loan margin if the Group delivers on those targets.

The term loan facility with Barclays Bank PLC is being used by the Group to part fund the development of the Group’s new head office premises. The term loan 
facility is secured against the new head office land and buildings asset and £8,780,000 of it was drawn down as at the period end (2020: £9,044,000).
The weighted average interest rates paid during the period were as follows:
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 2021 
%
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 2020 
%
Credit facility
2.4%
2.4%
Term loan
1.55%
1.9%
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Credit facility
5,140
12,660
Term loan
8,780
9,044
13,920
21,704
Borrowings are repayable as follows:
Credit facility
Within one year
5,140
12,660
Term loan
Within one year
1,056
264
Between one and two years
1,056
1,056
Between two and five years
6,668
7,724
8,780
9,044
Total borrowings
Within one year 
6,196
12,924
Between one and two years
1,056
1,056
Between two and five years
6,668
7,724
13,920
21,704

110
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
20. DEFERRED TAXATION
The following is the analysis of deferred tax assets/(liabilities) presented in the consolidated statement of financial position:
GROUP
FIXED ASSET 
TIMING 
DIFFERENCES
£’000
SHORT-TERM 
TIMING 
DIFFERENCES
£’000
OTHER TIMING 
DIFFERENCES
£’000
LOSSES
£’000
TOTAL
£’000
Balance as at 26 May 2019
333
(31)
657
–
959
Credit/(charge) to Income Statement
327
(566)
–
2,019
1,780
Credit/(charge) to other comprehensive income
–
472
(177)
–
295
RESTATED BALANCE AS AT 31 MAY 2020
660
(125)
480
2,019
3,034
Acquisition of subsidiary
(1,337)
–
(253)
–
(1,590)
Credit/(charge) to Income Statement
133
(79)
(227)
(1,239)
(1,412)
Credit to other comprehensive income
–
753
12
111
876
BALANCE AS AT 31 MAY 2021
(544)
549
12
891
908
There is no unprovided deferred tax in the current period for the Group (2020: £nil). The deferred tax asset on tax losses recognised in the current period is 
expected to be utilised against future taxable profits. The deferred tax asset on fixed asset and other timing differences is expected to reverse in future periods. 
21. CALLED UP SHARE CAPITAL
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Allotted and issued
111,543,593 Ordinary shares of £0.01 each (2020: 108,135,920)
1,116
1,081
Authorised
148,485,165 Ordinary shares of £0.01 each (2020: 148,485,165)
1,485
1,485
During the period new ordinary shares were issued to employees that left the business from the following share schemes: SAYE: nil shares (2020: 42,387), 
ESOP: nil shares (2020: 28,718), DBP: 107,132 shares (2020: nil), and LTIP: 14,384 shares (2020: 289,615).

During the period 2,828,535 ordinary shares were issued as part of the consideration paid in relation to the acquisition of The Garden Trading Company 
Limited.
All ordinary shares carry equal rights.

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 111
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
22. OTHER RESERVES 
MERGER RESERVE
The Company was incorporated on 1 May 2016. The acquisition of Joules Investments Holdings Limited by Joules Group plc on 31 May 2016 was 
accounted for using reverse acquisition accounting principles. As a result, a merger reserve of £125,807,000 was created upon acquisition and AIM listing of 
the Group on 31 May 2016.
RETAINED EARNINGS
The movement on retained earnings is as set out in the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity. Retained earnings represent cumulative profits or losses, 
net of dividends and other adjustments.

OTHER RESERVE
The recognition of an other reserve has arisen in the Period as a result of the acquisition of The Garden Trading Company Limited. The amount recognised of 
£4,817,000 represents the fair value of shares included within the consideration of the acquisition at a premium over the nominal amount and is not 
distributable.
SHARE PREMIUM
The share premium reserve contains the premium arising on the issue of equity shares, net of issue expenses incurred by the Company. On 31 May 2016 in an 
initial public offering Joules Group plc issued 7,175,851 ordinary £0.01 shares at a price of £1.60, resulting in a share premium of £11,409,603. 
During 2020, Joules Group plc undertook a placing of Ordinary Shares to certain existing shareholders and institutional and other investors, including 
Directors of the Company. The purpose of the placing was to secure cash proceeds in order to maintain sufficient working capital during the start of the 
COVID-19 outbreak and be able to emerge relatively stronger from this unprecedented situation. The placing resulted in an additional £15,098,000 being 
recognised in share premium.
£’000
Balance at 31 May 2020
26,508
Balance at 30 May 2021
26,508
23. HEDGING AND TRANSLATION RESERVE
GROUP
HEDGING 
RESERVE 
£’000
TRANSLATION 
RESERVE 
£’000
Balance as at 26 May 2019
2,631
518
Gain arising on changes in fair value on hedging instruments during the period
(2,631)
–
Other comprehensive income for the period
837
732
Deferred tax related to losses recognised in other comprehensive income during the period
(159)
–
Basis adjustment to hedged inventory
321
–
BALANCE AS AT 31 MAY 2020
999
1,250
Other comprehensive (expense) for the period
(4,286)
(1,900)
Deferred tax related to gains/(losses) recognised in other comprehensive income during the period
753
–
Basis adjustment to hedged inventory
(270)
–
BALANCE AS AT 30 MAY 2021
(2,804)
(650)
HEDGING RESERVE
The reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on hedging instruments in cash flow hedges. The cumulative deferred gain or loss on the hedging 
instrument is recognised in profit or loss only when the hedged transaction impacts the profit or loss or is included as a basis adjustment to the non-financial 
hedged item, consistent with the applicable accounting policy.
TRANSLATION RESERVE
Exchange differences relating to the translation of the net assets of the Group’s foreign operations which relate to subsidiaries only, from their functional 
currency into the Group’s presentational currency being Sterling, are recognised directly to the translation reserve. 
24. EBT RESERVE 
During the year ended 26 May 2019, the Group set up an Employee Benefit Trust (“EBT”). The EBT has an independent trustee resident in Jersey. 
At 30 May 2021 the EBT held 291,469 (2020: 291,469) ordinary shares of 1p each in the Company purchased for a total consideration of £769,000 
(2020: £769,000). 
The consideration paid for the ordinary shares of 1p each in the Company held by the EBT at 30 May 2021 has been shown as an EBT reserve and 
presented within equity for the Company and the Group. All other assets, liabilities, income and costs of the EBT have been incorporated into the accounts of 
the Company and the Group.

112
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
24. EBT RESERVE CONTINUED
The table below shows the movements in equity from EBT share purchases during the year:
2021
2020
SHARES
£’000
SHARES
£’000
Shares purchased by EBT in the year
–
–
453,277
1,171
Shares issued on employee option exercises
–
–
(280,108)
(724)
25. CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Cash and cash at bank
17,997
26,243
26. ANALYSIS OF NET CASH/NET DEBT
AT 
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
CASH FLOW 
£’000
NON-CASH 
CHANGES 
£’000
AT 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
Cash at bank and in hand
26,243
(6,970)
(1,276)
17,997
Net cash per statement of cash flows
26,243
(6,970)
(1,276)
17,997
Borrowings 
(21,704)
7,784
–
(13,920)
Net cash before lease liabilities
4,539
814
(1,276)
4,077
Lease liabilities
(46,682)
12,542
(5,671)
(39,811)
Contingent consideration
–
–
(5,646)
(5,646)
NET DEBT AFTER LEASE LIABILITIES
(42,143)
13,356
(12,593)
(41,380)
Non-cash changes relate to movements in interest on borrowings, the retranslation of foreign currency balances at the end of the period and lease 
acquisitions, disposals and modifications.
27. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
CATEGORIES OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Carrying value of financial assets at amortised cost:
Cash and cash equivalents
25
17,997
26,243
Trade receivables
16
9,539
4,973
27,536
31,216
Carrying value of financial assets at fair value:
Cash flow hedges
15
–
1,311
Asset held for sale
3
4,800
–
TOTAL FINANCIAL ASSETS
32,336
35,527
Financial liabilities held at amortised cost:
Trade payables
17
(25,505)
(14,777)
Accruals
17
(26,053)
(12,481)
Borrowings
19
(13,920)
(21,704)
Lease liabilities 
12
(39,811)
(46,682)
(105,289)
(95,644)
Financial liabilities held at fair value:
Cash flow hedges
15
(3,129)
(473)
Contingent consideration
3
(5,646)
–
Asset held for sale – lease liability
3
(2,400)
–
TOTAL FINANCIAL LIABILITIES 
(116,464)
(96,117)

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 113
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
27. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS CONTINUED
INTEREST RATE SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS
If interest rates on all borrowings had been 1% higher/lower and all other variables were held constant, the Group’s profit for the period ended 52 weeks to 
30 May 2021 would decrease/increase by £88,000 (2020: £106,000). This has been calculated by applying the amended interest rate to the weighted 
average rate of borrowings for the period to 30 May 2021 for borrowings at the period end, other than borrowings which are held at a fixed interest rate as 
those borrowings are not sensitive to external variables, such as movement in interest rates.
FOREIGN CURRENCY SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS
The Group is mainly exposed to fluctuations in the US $, which is used for stock purchases. If the USD exchange rate strengthened/weakened by 10 percent 
and all other variables were held constant, the Group’s profit for the period ended 52 weeks to 30 May 2021 would increase/decrease by £547,000 and 
£669,000 respectively (2020: £208,000 and £138,000). This has been calculated by applying the amended currency rate to the USD value of financial 
assets and financial liabilities held at the period end, an amended rate has not been applied to USD purchases in the period as they have been effectively 
hedged against currency fluctuations via forward contracts.
EXPECTED CREDIT LOSS SENSITIVITY
Deterioration in the ability of customers to afford their payments will have an impact on the Group’s Expected Credit Loss (“ECL”).
In the eight weeks following the year end date, £6,915,000 of the £9,889,000 Joules Group plc’s customer and other trade receivables have been settled. 
LIQUIDITY AND INTEREST RISK TABLES
The following tables detail the Group’s remaining contractual maturity for its derivative and non-derivative financial liabilities with agreed repayment periods. 
The tables have been drawn up based on the undiscounted cash flows of financial liabilities based on the earliest date on which the Group can be required 
to pay. The table includes both interest and principal cash flows. To the extent that interest flows are floating rates, the undiscounted amount is derived from 
interest rate curves at the balance sheet date. The contractual maturity is based on the earliest date on which the Group may be required to pay.
WEIGHTED 
AVERAGE 
EFFECTIVE 
INTEREST RATE
%
LESS THAN 
1 MONTH
£’000
1-3 MONTHS
£’000
3 MONTHS TO 
1 YEAR
£’000
1-5 YEARS
£’000
TOTAL
£’000
30 MAY 2021
Credit facility
2.4
(9)
(18)
(5,113)
–
(5,140)
Term loan
1.55
–
(297)
(885)
(7,598)
(8,780)
Trade payables
–
(23,470)
(174)
(1,861)
–
(25,505)
Accruals
–
(12,280)
(10,555)
(2,639)
–
(25,474)
Contingent consideration
–
–
–
(5,646)
–
(5,646)
Lease liabilities 
2.5
(780)
(2,340)
(6,240)
(30,451)
(39,811)
NON-DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
(36,539)
(13,384)
(22,384)
(38,049)
(110,356)
DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
(9,662)
(12,760)
(46,255)
–
(68,677)
TOTAL CONTRACTUAL CASH FLOWS
(46,201)
(26,144)
(68,639)
(38,049)
(179,033)
31 MAY 2020
Credit facility
2.4
(25)
(51)
(12,736)
–
(12,812)
Term loan
1.9
–
(49)
(411)
(9,199)
(9,659)
Finance leases
–
(6,379)
(8,398)
–
–
(14,777)
Trade payables
–
(5,564)
(4,451)
(1,113)
–
(11,128)
Accruals
2.5
(921)
(1,841)
(8,285)
(35,635)
(46,682)
NON-DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
(12,889)
(14,790)
(22,545)
(44,834)
(95,058)
DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
(5,427)
(20,798)
(31,765)
(4,469)
(62,459)
TOTAL CONTRACTUAL CASH FLOWS
(18,316)
(35,588)
(54,310)
(49,303)
(157,517)
The Group has significant financial assets in trade debtors which are easily convertible to cash. In addition, the above table includes derivative financial 
instruments where there would be corresponding cash inflows on maturity of the forward contract.

114
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
27. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS CONTINUED
CARRYING VALUE OF FINANCIAL ASSETS
The Directors have assessed that, on the basis of the net assets of the owing companies, net receivables are fully recoverable. A significant decrease in the net 
assets and trade of the owing company or a decline in the financial position of customers would trigger an impairment review. 
CREDIT RISK
In the opinion of the Directors, the only financial instrument that is subject to credit risk is the trade receivables. The Directors believe that the Expected Credit 
Loss provision as disclosed in Note 16 represents the Directors’ best estimate of the maximum exposure to credit risk at period-end. 
FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
Financial instruments are measured in accordance with the accounting policy set out in Note 1. Foreign currency forward contracts and options are 
considered Level 2, and contingent consideration arising on the acquisition of The Garden Trading Limited is considered Level 3. In the opinion of the 
Directors, the fair value of the financial assets and liabilities are equal to their book values. 
LIQUIDITY RISK MANAGEMENT
The Directors believe that the receivables are not impaired and that the owing companies have sufficient net assets to repay the balances. Therefore, the 
Directors believe that liquidity risk is minimal.
CAPITAL RISK MANAGEMENT 
The Directors maintain detailed cash forecasts which are frequently revised to actuals to ensure that the Group has sufficient liquid resources to meet its 
requirements. 
FOREIGN CURRENCY ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
Included within the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position are £12,268,000 (2020: £11,980,000) of assets and £4,817,000 (2020: £4,105,000) 
of liabilities relating to the overseas subsidiaries which have been translated in the consolidation at the period-end rate. These balances are subject to 
movements in exchange rates, as shown in the statement of changes in equity. The Directors do not believe the risk is significant enough to warrant hedging 
against the investments in overseas subsidiaries.
Also included within the above table are foreign denominated external trade payables and receivables of £10,103,000 (2020: 3,714,000) and £834,000 
(2020: £5,850,000) respectively.
28. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation.
The Directors control 24,499,058 shares (2020: 30,420,923 shares) in Joules Group plc, which represents 22% (2020: 28.0%) of the issued share capital. 
The remuneration of the Directors of the Group is disclosed in Note 6 and the Directors’ Remuneration Report. No other employees are considered to be key 
management personnel as defined by IAS 24. In addition, Directors participate in share schemes and dividend payments, further details of which can be 
found in note 30 and 31 respectively.
29. EARNINGS PER SHARE
Basic and diluted earnings per share are calculated by dividing profit attributable to ordinary equity holders by the weighted average number of ordinary 
shares in issue during the period.
For the calculation of diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of shares in issue is further adjusted to assume conversion of all potentially 
dilutive ordinary shares. The Company has one category of potentially dilutive ordinary shares, being management shares not yet vested. 
During the 53 weeks ended 31 May 2020, diluted loss per share was capped at the basic loss per share as the impact of dilution cannot result in a reduction 
in the loss per share. 
52 WEEKS 
ENDED 
30 MAY 
2021
RESTATED
53 WEEKS 
ENDED 
31 MAY 
2020
Basic earnings/(loss) per share (pence)
0.82
(21.61)
Diluted earnings/(loss) per share (pence)
0.81
(21.61)
The calculation of basic and diluted earnings/(loss) per share is based on the following data:
EARNINGS
£’000 
£’000
Earnings/(loss) for the purpose of basic and diluted earnings per share
893
(20,276)
NUMBER OF SHARES
Weighted number of ordinary shares for the purpose of basic earnings per share
109,185,216
93,829,041
Potentially dilutive share awards
1,047,593
929,026
Weighted number of ordinary shares for the purpose of diluted earnings per share
110,232,809
94,758,067

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 115
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
30. SHARE-BASED COMPENSATION
SUMMARY OF MOVEMENT IN AWARDS
NUMBER OF SHARES
DBP 
ESOP
LTIP
SAYE
TOTAL
OUTSTANDING AT 31 MAY 2020
571,887
77,404
3,360,919
643,770
4,653,980
Granted during the year
11,594
823,705
3,798,625
387,370
5,021,294
Lapsed during the year
–
–
–
(171,503)
(171,503)
Cancelled during the year
–
(34,159)
(2,520,945)
(162,329)
(2,717,433)
Exercised during the year
(107,132)
–
(590,593)
–
(697,725)
OUTSTANDING AT 30 MAY 2021
476,349
866,950
4,048,006
697,308
6,088,613
EXERCISABLE AT 30 MAY 2021
51,455
46,551
57,755
24,603
180,364
As part of measures taken by the Group to preserve cash during the COVID-19 crisis, Marc Dench, Nick Jones and the Group’s employees agreed to take a 
pay reduction and were granted options on 6 April 2020 over 107,859 ordinary shares in Joules Group plc with a value commensurate with the value of the 
salaries waived. In response to shareholder feedback, during the period the Board agreed to waive their FY20 LTIP awards in lieu of salary.
All share options were valued using the Black-Scholes model. Expected volatility was determined by management, using comparator volatility as a basis for 
share options granted in 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019 and 2020 and Joules historic volatility data for the share options granted in 2020 and 2021. The expected 
life of the options was determined based on management’s best estimate. The expected dividend yield was based on the anticipated dividend policy of the 
Company over the expected life of the options. The risk-free rate of return input into the model was a zero-coupon government bond with a life in line with the 
expected life of the options.
The fair value of the total shares issued during the period and measured as at issue date is £5,942,501.
The inputs into the model were as follows:
 
DBP
ESOP
LTIP
SAYE
Weighted average share price
£2.32
£1.71
£0.23
£2.42
Weighted average exercise price 
£0.01
£1.53
£0.01
£1.95
No. of employees
4
18
602
108
Shares under option
715,613
1,589,002
9,314,433
1,813,440
Expected volatility
28%–78%
28%–71%
28%–124%
28%–71%
Expected life (Years)
3
3
3
3
Risk-free rate
0.08%–0.44%
0.05%–0.55%
0.07%–0.55%
0.08%–0.55%
Possibility of ceasing employment before vesting
0%
0%
0%–7.5%
10%–15%
Expectations of meeting performance criteria
100%
100%
95%
95%
Expected dividend yield
0%–1.9%
0%–1.9%
0%–1.9%
0%–1.9%
The Group recognised a net expense of £1,303,000 during the year (2020: credit of £246,000) relating to cash settled and equity settled share-based 
compensation. Including associated employer’s National Insurance contributions which in the year was an expense of £350,000 (2020: £125,000 credit), 
the Group recognised a total expense of £1,653,000 during the year (2020: credit of £371,000).
DEFERRED BONUS PLAN (“DBP”)
The DBP operates in conjunction with the Group’s annual bonus plan. The number of ordinary shares subject to a DBP award will be the number of shares that 
have a market value equal to the value of the annual bonus deferred into a DBP award. DBP awards take the form of nil-cost options, vest on the third 
anniversary of the date on which the relevant annual bonus was determined and are normally exercisable until the tenth anniversary of the grant date.
EXECUTIVE SHARE OPTION PLAN (“ESOP”)
The Group operated a share option scheme during the period for certain employees under the Executive Share Option Plan (“ESOP”). The different options 
vest between two years and three years and have an exercise life between three and ten years from grant date. All option schemes are subject to continued 
employment over the vesting period.

116
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
30. SHARE-BASED COMPENSATION CONTINUED
LONG TERM INCENTIVE PLAN (“LTIP”)
The Board approved Long Term Incentive Plan 2016 (“LTIP 2016”) allows the grant of options to Executive Directors and senior management of the Group in 
the form of nil-cost options over ordinary shares in Joules Group plc. The options are exercisable three years after the date of grant subject to achieving 
certain stretching targets. 
The target of share option awards granted to the Executive Directors and members of the operating board in 2018 is 80% based on an EPS target in the final 
year of the relevant performance period, being the financial year ending May 2021 and 20% of the target is based on achieving specified international 
revenue targets.
The share option awards granted to the Executive Directors, members of the operating board and some senior managers in 2019 are based upon 
achievement against four targets in the year ending May 2022: US revenue, UK digital sales, colleague engagement and EPS.
The share option awards granted to the Executive Directors, members of the operating board and some senior managers in FY21 are based upon 
achievement against two targets, to be delivered in the final year of the performance period (FY23). 50% of the awards will be subject to adjusted, diluted 
EPS, and 50% subject to the volume weighted average price of Shares in the last 90 days of the performance period.
For other senior management awards the target is based on the cumulative PBT over the three years to May 2021, May 2022 and May 2023. The 
calculation includes an assumption that 10% of senior managers on the scheme would cease employment before vesting.
SAVE AS YOU EARN SCHEME (“SAYE”)
Under the terms of the SAYE scheme, the Board grants options to purchase ordinary shares in the Company to employees who enter into the HMRC-approved 
SAYE scheme for a term of three years. Options are granted at up to 20% discount to the market price of the shares on the day preceding the date of offer and 
are exercisable for a period of six months after completion of the SAYE contract.
31. DIVIDENDS
30 MAY 2021
31 MAY 2020
PENCE PER 
SHARE
£000
PENCE PER 
SHARE
£000
Interim dividend paid in the financial year
–
–
–
–
Final dividend proposed, not accrued, payable subject to approval at AGM
–
–
–
–
TOTAL
–
–
–
–
The Directors are not proposing a dividend this year.

32. POST-BALANCE SHEET EVENT
Since the period end, the Group has disposed of the property acquired as part of the acquisition of The Garden Trading Company Limited, which was 
recognised as an asset held for sale in the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 30 May 2021.

Completion of the new head office for the Group took place in June 2021.

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 117
COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
NOTE
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
NON-CURRENT ASSETS 
Investments
34
156,331
139,980
TOTAL NON-CURRENT ASSETS
156,331
139,980
CURRENT ASSETS
Cash and cash equivalents
–
95
Other receivables
35
14,652
14,315
TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS
14,652
14,410
TOTAL ASSETS 
170,983
154,390
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Other payables
36
20,864
7,685
TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES
20,864
7,685
TOTAL ASSETS LESS CURRENT LIABILITIES
150,119
146,705
CAPITAL AND RESERVES
Called up share capital
37
1,116
1,081
Share premium
38
26,508
26,508
EBT reserve
24
(769)
(769)
Retained earnings
118,447
119,885
Other reserve
4,817
–
SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS
150,119
146,705
The parent company loss for the period was £1,438,000 (2020: loss of £797,000).
These financial statements of Joules Group plc (Company Registration Number 10164829) were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue 
on 2 August 2021 and were signed on behalf of the Board of Directors by 
NICHOLAS JONES
Chief Executive Officer
COMPANY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 
JOULES GROUP PLC

118
COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
NOTE
SHARE 
CAPITAL
£’000
SHARE 
PREMIUM
£’000
RETAINED 
EARNINGS
£’000
EBT
RESERVE
£’000
OTHER 
RESERVE
£’000
TOTAL
EQUITY
£’000
BALANCE AT 26 MAY 2019
878 
11,410 
122,233
(322) 
–
134,200 
Shares issues
203
15,098
–
–
–
15,301
EBT share purchases and commitments
22
–
–
–
(1,171)
–
(1,171)
Share-based compensation options 
satisfied through the EBT reserve
–
–
(349)
724
–
375
Dividend paid
29
–
–
(1,202)
–
–
(1,202)
Loss for the year and total 
comprehensive expense
– 
– 
(797)
–
–
(797)
BALANCE AT 31 MAY 2020
1,081
26,508
119,885
(769)
–
146,705
Shares issued
35
–
–
–
–
35
Loss for the year and total 
comprehensive expense
–
–
(1,438)
–
–
(1,438)
Acquisition of subsidiary
–
–
–
–
4,817
4,817
BALANCE AT 30 MAY 2021
1,116
26,508
118,447
(769)
4,817
150,119
COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
JOULES GROUP PLC

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 119
NOTES TO THE COMPANY 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
33. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
BASIS OF PREPARATION
These separate financial statements of Joules Group plc were prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101, Reduced Disclosure 
Framework (FRS 101). 
The Company’s financial statements are presented in GBP. 
As permitted by FRS 101, the Company has taken advantage of the disclosure exemptions available under that standard in relation to: 
•	 Share-based compensation; 
•	 financial instruments; 
•	 capital management; 
•	 presentation of comparative information in respect of certain assets; 
•	 presentation of a cashflow statements;
•	 standards not yet effective;
•	 certain related parties transactions; and
•	 business combinations.
As permitted by section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the profit and loss account is not presented. The loss for the year amounted to £1,438,000, (2020: 
loss of £797,000).
Director remuneration for the period was £216,000 (2020: £216,000) in relation to Non-Executive Directors, further detailed in Note 6.
Auditor remuneration for the period was £225,000 (2020: £141,000), further detailed in Note 7.
The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention. The principal accounting policies adopted are the same as those set out in 
Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements except as set out below.
INVESTMENTS
Fixed asset investments are stated at cost less provisions for diminution in value.
GOING CONCERN
Going concern for the Company has been considered along with the Group by the Directors. The consideration is set out in note 1 of the consolidated 
financial statements.
SHARES HELD BY EBT
The Joules Group plc Employee Benefit Trust (“EBT”) is set up to provide for the issue of shares to Group employees, principally under share option schemes. 
Shares in the Company held by the EBT are included in the Balance Sheet at cost, including any directly attributable incremental costs, as a deduction from 
equity.

OTHER RESERVE
The recognition of an other reserve has arisen in the Period as a result of the acquisition of The Garden Trading Company Limited. The amount recognised of 
£4,817,000 represents the fair value of shares included within the consideration of the acquisition at a premium over the nominal amount and is not 
distributable.

AMOUNTS OWED TO/FROM GROUP UNDERTAKINGS
Amounts owed to/from group undertakings are recorded at amortised cost. The terms of the intercompany balances are at nil interest and are repayable on 
demand.
CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND KEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY
There were no critical accounting judgements that would have a significant effect on the amounts recognised in the parent company financial statements or 
key sources of estimation uncertainty at the balance sheet date that would have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of 
assets and liabilities within the next year. There were also no sources of estimation uncertainty. 
34. INVESTMENTS
£’000 
Cost and Net Book Value
At 31 May 2020
139,980
Acquisition of subsidiary
16,351
At 30 May 2021
156,331
On 31 May 2016 Joules Group plc acquired the entire share capital of Joules Investments Holdings Limited.
On 9 February Joules Group plc acquired the entire share capital of The Garden Trading Company Limited (see Note 3 for further details).

120 NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
34. INVESTMENTS CONTINUED
The Company’s subsidiaries, as at the period end are shown in the table below. All subsidiaries have been in existence for the whole of the reporting period, 
with the exception of The Garden Trading Company Limited.
SUBSIDIARIES
As at the period-end the Group has the following subsidiaries, those marked with * being indirect holdings:
SUBSIDIARY NAME
NATURE OF 
BUSINESS
PLACE OF 
INCORPORATION 
AND OPERATION REGISTERED ADDRESS
PROPORTION OF 
OWNERSHIP 
INTEREST
PROPORTION 
OF VOTING 
POWER HELD
Joules Investments Holdings Limited
Holding company
England and Wales
The Joules Barn, 
Rockingham Road, 
Market Harborough
100%
100%
Joules Limited*
Retailer
England and Wales
The Joules Barn, 
Rockingham Road, 
Market Harborough
100%
100%
Joules Hong Kong Limited*
Overseas trading 
entity
Hong Kong
18/F, United Centre, 95 
Queensway, Admiralty, 
Hong Kong
100%
100%
Joules Clothing Shanghai Company Limited*
Overseas office
China
Room 1401–1404, 
No.432 West Huaihai 
Road, Changning District, 
Shanghai, China 
100%
100%
Joules USA Inc.*
Overseas trading 
entity
USA
103 Foulk Road, Suite 
202, Wilmington, 
DE19803, USA
100%
100%
Joules Developments Limited*
Non-trading entity
England and Wales
The Joules Barn, 
Rockingham Road, 
Market Harborough
100%
100%
Joules Property Limited*
Non-trading entity
England and Wales
The Joules Barn, 
Rockingham Road, 
Market Harborough
100%
100%
Tom Joule Europe Limited*
Non-trading entity
Republic of Ireland
Suite 3, One Earlsfort 
Centre, Lower Hatch 
Street, Dublin
100%
100%
The Garden Trading Company Limited
Retailer
England and Wales
The Joules Barn, 
Rockingham Road, 
Market Harborough
100%
100%
35. OTHER DEBTORS
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Amounts owed by group undertakings
14,557
14,187
Prepayments
42
63
Other receivables
53
65
14,652
14,315
Amounts owed by group undertakings are in relation to the placing of shares in April 2020. The terms of the intercompany balance receivable is at nil interest, 
payable on demand.

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 121
NOTES TO THE COMPANY 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
36. OTHER PAYABLES
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Trade payables
–
180
Payables due to subsidiary
14,551
7,466
Accruals
667
39
Contingent consideration
5,646
–
20,864
7,685
The payables due to subsidiary is in relation to administrative expenses and dividends paid by Joules Limited on behalf of Joules Group plc. The terms of the 
intercompany balance receivable is at nil interest, payable on demand. Contingent consideration in relation to the acquisition of The Garden Trading 
Company Limited is furthered detailed in Note 3.
37. CALLED UP SHARE CAPITAL 
30 MAY 2021 
£’000
31 MAY 2020 
£’000
Allotted and issued
111,527,276 Ordinary shares of £0.01 each (2020: 108,135,920)
1,116
1,081
Authorised
148,485,165 Ordinary shares of £0.01 each (2020: 148,485,165)
1,485
1,485
During the period new ordinary shares were issued to employees that left the business from the following share schemes: SAYE: nil shares (2020: 42,387), 
ESOP: nil shares (2020: 28,718), DBP: 107,132 shares (2020: nil), and LTIP: 14,384 shares (2020: 289,615).
The company was incorporated on 1 May 2016. The acquisition of Joules Investments Holdings Limited by Joules Group plc on 31 May 2016 has been 
accounted for using reverse acquisition accounting principles. As a result, a merger reserve of £125,807,000 was created upon acquisition and AIM listing of 
the Group on 31 May 2016.

During the period 2,828,535 ordinary shares were issued as part of the consideration paid in relation to the acquisition of The Garden Trading Company 
Limited.
All ordinary shares carry equal rights.
38. SHARE PREMIUM 
The share premium reserve contains the premium arising on the issue of equity shares, net of issue expenses incurred by the Company. On 31 May 2016 in an 
initial public offering Joules Group plc issued 7,175,851 ordinary £0.01 shares at a price of £1.60, resulting in share premium of £11,409,603. 
During 2020, Joules Group plc undertook a placing of Ordinary Shares to certain existing shareholders and institutional and other investors, including 
Directors of the Company. The purpose of the placing was to secure cash proceeds in order to maintain sufficient working capital during the start of the 
COVID-19 outbreak and be able to emerge relatively stronger from this unprecedented situation. The placing resulted in an additional £15,098,000 being 
recognised in share premium.
£’000
Balance at 31 May 2020
26,508
Balance at 30 May 2021
26,508
39. DIVIDEND
No dividend was paid during the year (see Note 31).
40. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
The Company has taken advantage of the disclosure not to disclose related party transactions with wholly owned fellow group companies. Related party 
transactions with key management personnel (which are the Directors) are shown in Note 28 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

122

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
	 Chapter 3
 123

124

COMPANY INFORMATION
JOULES GROUP PLC
JOULES GROUP PLC
Registered in England and Wales number: 10164829
COMPANY SECRETARY
Jonathan William Dargie
REGISTERED OFFICE
The Joules Barn
Rockingham Road
Market Harborough
Leicestershire, LE16 7QD
WEBSITE
www.joulesgroup.com
NOMINATED ADVISER & BROKER
Peel Hunt LLP, Moor House,
120 London Wall,
London, EC2Y 5ET
BROKER
Liberum Capital Limited
Ropemaker Place, Level 12,
25 Ropemaker Street,
London, EC2Y 9LY
CORPORATE PR
Hudson Sandler
25 Charterhouse Square,
London, EC1M 6AE
LEGAL ADVISERS TO THE COMPANY
Eversheds LLP,
115 Colmore Row,
Birmingham, B3 3AL
AUDITOR
Deloitte LLP,
Victoria St, 
St Albans 
AL1 3TF
REGISTRARS
Equiniti Limited, Aspect House,
Spencer Road,
Lancing, BN99 6DA